JP6586139B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be able to be controlled to an advantageous state such as a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result.

  Further, as a gaming machine as described above, there is known a gaming machine that displays an operation promotion image corresponding to the operating means during the effective period of the operating means (button or the like) (for example, see Patent Document 1). According to Patent Literature 1, if no operation is performed, the operation promotion image may gradually increase or may change from a button-shaped operation promotion image to a patrol-shaped operation promotion image.

JP 2006-83473 A

  However, the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means changes with time, and when operated early, the operation promotion image does not change.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game and capable of detecting a player's operation. Specific detection means (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, etc.) and a predetermined display (timer display of FIG. 58, etc.) perform a predetermined operation (time counting operation, etc.). Is displayed as “0” display mode, etc.) (the display control microcomputer 90100, the processing of the effect symbol variation in FIG. 55, S90922, S90934, etc. in FIG. 62), and the predetermined display is the specific mode When it becomes (such as when the timer display becomes “0”), multiple types of specific effects (high expectation expectation suggestion display or low expectation expectation suggestion display) ) In which any specific effect can be executed (FIGS. 57 (B) and (C)), such as the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect symbol variation processing in FIG. Specific display corresponding to the means (for example, small button (white) D1, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4, small button (white) D1U shown in FIGS. 25, 32 to 38) Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect process (S529), variable display effect process (S172), etc.) for performing a large button (white) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc. The specific display executing means includes a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D1) as the specific display, and a player's advantage (for example, a big hit expectation, 16R) than the first specific display. The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white) D1) with a high expectation level which is a variable big hit (see FIG. 7), a normal big hit and an expected degree which is a probable big hit when there is a probable big hit In this case, the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D2, the second specific display is the large button (white) (Red) D3, stick D4, etc. When the first specific display is a large button (red) D3, the second specific display can be displayed as a stick D4, etc., and the ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, In T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 32C). A small button (white) D1 is displayed on Later, the small button (white) D1 is changed to a large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 33G, and the large button (white) D2 is changed to a large button (red) as shown in FIG. ) D3), in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, etc.), the second specific display after the change (for example, FIG. 33 (J) or As shown in FIG. 33 (K), an operation effect using large buttons (red) D3, large buttons (red) D3U, etc. (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the predetermined display unit is executed when the first period (such as 25 seconds in FIG. 57B) has elapsed. From the first display (display of the first effect in FIG. 57 (B), etc.) or from the first period When a long second period (60 seconds in FIG. 57C) has elapsed, the second display in which the predetermined display becomes the specific mode (display of the third effect in FIG. 57C, etc.) is displayed. It is possible to control the production so that the ratio of the specific display displayed is higher during the second period than during the first period (as shown in FIGS. 59C to 59E). The third effect with a longer timer period is set to have a higher ratio of executing the operation effect, the total number of operations is set, and the number of operations per unit time is larger than the first effect with a shorter timer period. It is characterized by further comprising production control means.

According to the above configuration, the production effect is improved. In addition, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom in the production.
In other examples described later, the “detection means” may be referred to as “motion detection means”, and the “specific display” corresponding to the detection means may be referred to as “motion corresponding effect” corresponding to the player's action. is there.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1), the first specific display is an effect that acts on the specific display (for example, a weak effect, a medium effect, and a strong effect shown in FIG. 27C). Is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 34C is changed to the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 34D or FIG. 34E). White) When the weak action effect that displays the image JS1 and the image JS2 acting on D1 is executed, the button changes to the large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 34E, and the large effect shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35H and 35I, the button (white) D2 has a medium effect effect for displaying the image TS1, the image TS2, and the image TS3 acting on the large button (white) D2. To change to the stick D4 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 38B and 38C, the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 38 has a strong action effect for displaying the image TK1, the image TK2, and the image TK3 acting on the small button (white) D1. When executed, it may be changed to a stick D4 as shown in FIG.

  According to the said structure, a production effect improves with an effect production.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action shown in FIG. 27C). The ratio of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 27C, there is a change and no change). In the case of (weak change, medium change or strong change), the determination ratio of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect is different. The rate of change to the specific display may be different).

  According to the said structure, the expectation with respect to an effect effect can be raised.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium effect effect shown in FIG. 27C), There is a strong action effect etc., and the display mode of the specific display after the change is a plurality of types (for example, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4 shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38). , A large button (white) D2U, a large button (red) D3U, a stick D4U, etc.), and the ratio of which the specific display changes depends on which action effect is executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 27 (C), a weak action effect and a medium action in the case of a weak change (1 step change), a middle change (2 step change), and a strong change (3 step change). Since the decision ratios of production and strong action production are different, For example, when the small change (white) D1 is before the change, the weak change is executed. Small button (white) D1 changes to large button (white) D2, small button (white) D1 changes to large button (red) D3 when medium change is executed, and small when strong change is executed The button (white) D1 changes to the stick D4, and therefore the ratio of which specific display changes depends on which button or the like effect is executed.

  According to the said structure, the expectation with respect to an effect effect can be raised.

(5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after the change. The motion effect detected by the detecting means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the motion effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the changed large button (white) D2 is executed, as shown in FIG. 33). As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 38, the action controller detects the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D3 after the change, and the stick controller 31A corresponding to the stick D4 after the change. The detected motion effect may be executed).

  According to the above configuration, it can be noted which specific display corresponds to which operation means.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the specific display execution unit is configured to detect the ineffective period of detection by the detection unit (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, etc. ), The specific display is displayed in a manner indicating the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, a small button ( White) D1, a large button (white) D2 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon, a large button (red) D3 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon, and a stick D4 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon may be displayed). .

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is ineffective.

(7) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). The specific display may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, and the like may be changed.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player , A countdown effect, an accessory fall effect, etc.) can be executed, an action effect acting on the specific display is executed when the notice effect is executed, and the second specification is executed when the action effect is executed You may make it change into a display.

  According to the above configuration, a sense of expectation for a specific notice effect can be enhanced.

(9) In any one of the above-described (1) to (8), the gaming machine has a first state (for example, a state where the auto button function is disabled) or a second state (for example, a state where the auto button function is disabled). Setting means (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39, etc.) that can be set to an auto button function enabled state, and a specific effect (for example, a button notice) In the productions A to C and the decision button production, it is possible to execute a display for reducing the scale of the gauge display, a notice display or a display of the success / failure display based on the detected operation of the push button 31B. Specific production execution means (for example, the variable display production process shown in FIG. 22), and the specific production execution means is based on the detection result of the detection means in the first state. While it is possible to execute a specific effect if the effect execution condition is satisfied, in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect as the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means (for example, When the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 31B is not operated, a notice display, a success / failure display, a display for reducing the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed) The means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detecting means during execution of variable display (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S7103 to S7104 in FIG. 39, etc.) It may be.

  According to the said structure, it can prevent that an interest falls.

  Moreover, the invention concerning the following means 10 to means 24 is included in the form for implementing the invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in gaming machines, a period display such as a timer display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-61767 has been performed, and when the period display is in a predetermined mode (0 seconds), What performs a production is known. In this gaming machine, the effect when the period display is executed is an effect that merely shows the player the progress of the effect according to the mode of the period display. However, there was a problem that it was easy to get bored with the production. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a player's boredom in production.

(10) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs a predetermined game,
Motion detection means (push sensor 90124, tilt direction sensor unit 90123, etc.) capable of detecting a motion (operation, etc.) by a player;
Predetermined display means (microcomputer for effect control 90100, FIG. 58) that performs a predetermined operation (timer operation etc.) of the predetermined display (timer display etc.) and a specific mode (timer display is “0” display mode, etc.) 55 production symbol variation processing, FIG. 62 S90922, S90934 etc.),
When the predetermined display becomes the specific mode (such as when the timer display becomes “0”), a plurality of types of specific effects (high expectation expectation suggestion display or low expectation expectation suggestion display, etc.) ) In which any specific effect can be executed (FIGS. 57 (B) and (C)), a specific effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 90100, effect symbol variation processing in FIG. 55, etc.)
Based on the detection result of the motion detecting means, the motion corresponding effect means (effect control microcomputer 90100, FIG. 55) capable of executing the action corresponding effect corresponding to the player's action (the operation corresponding effects of FIGS. 57 and 58). In the production symbol variation process, S90927, S90929, etc. of FIG.
The predetermined display means is a first display in which the predetermined display becomes the specific mode when the first period (such as 25 seconds in FIG. 57B) has elapsed (display of the first effect in FIG. 57B, etc.) ) Or a second display (third of FIG. 57C) in which the predetermined display becomes the specific mode when a second period (60 seconds of FIG. 57C) longer than the first period has elapsed. Production display etc.),
The production is controlled so that the rate at which the motion-related production is executed is higher during the second period than during the first period (as shown in FIGS. 59C to 59E). The third effect with a longer duration is set to have a higher ratio of executing the operation effect than the first effect with a shorter timer period, the total number of operations is set, and the number of operations per unit time is set more. Etc.).

  According to such a structure, it can be made possible to reduce that a player is bored in production.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10),
The motion-corresponding effect means can execute a plurality of types of motion-corresponding effects (the first operation effect to the fifth operation effect in FIGS. 57 and 58, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by being able to execute a plurality of types of motion corresponding effects.

(12) In the gaming machine of (10) or (11),
In the second period, the effect control means can execute the action-corresponding effect for every predetermined period (time T (such as 10 seconds) in FIG. 57) (FIG. 57).

  According to such a configuration, the player's boredom can be reduced in the second period longer than the first period.

(13) In any one of the gaming machines (10) to (12),
The motion-corresponding effect means, as the motion-corresponding effect, has an effect (such as the expectation level% in FIGS. 57 and 58) that suggests an expectation level that is advantageous for the player (such as a big hit game state), and a plurality of types. At least one of the effects that suggests which of the predetermined effects is to be executed (for example, suggesting the development of a special reach production) Example of an operation effect that suggests whether to be executed]).

  According to such a configuration, variations of the motion corresponding effects can be enriched, and the player's boredom can be further reduced.

(14) In the gaming machine of any one of (10) to (13),
The motion detection means is provided with a plurality of types (a plurality of types such as a push sensor 90124 and a tilt direction sensor unit 90123) in a manner capable of detecting a plurality of types of motion by the player,
In the second period, the effect control means can execute the action-related effect in response to detection of a motion by the different motion detection means for each predetermined period (as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58). According to the timing, an operation effect according to the button operation and an operation effect according to the stick operation can be executed).

  According to such a configuration, the motion-corresponding effect can be executed in accordance with the detection of the motion by the different motion detection means, so that the player's boredom can be further reduced.

(15) In the gaming machine of any one of (10) to (14),
In the second period, there are a case where the predetermined display is performed (timer effect of FIG. 57 (C1)) and a case where the predetermined display is not performed (timer effect of FIG. 57 (C2)) (FIG. 59A). ), (B)),
In the second period, the effect control means produces an effect such that the rate at which the motion-related effect is executed is higher when the predetermined display is performed than when the predetermined display is not performed. Control (as shown in FIGS. 59 (C) to (E)), it is possible to select to perform the operation effect only when the timer display is present, and when the timer display effect is performed, the timer display effect is not performed. The rate at which operation effects are executed is also high.)
According to such a configuration, in the two periods, when the predetermined display is performed, the rate at which the motion corresponding effect is executed is higher than when the predetermined display is not performed, so that the player intervenes. The execution ratio of possible effects increases, and the player can be further reduced from being bored with the effects.

(16) In the gaming machine of any one of (10) to (15),
Special effect execution means (execution control microcomputer 90100, processing for executing special effect in S90802 of FIG. 55, etc.) capable of executing a special effect (special effect or the like by showing and hiding the timer frame 9097 in FIG. 63B) Further comprising
The special effect execution means can execute the special effect before execution of the predetermined display (FIGS. 63 (b), (d), etc.), and also when the predetermined display is not executed (during the gas effect) The special effects can be executed (FIGS. 63B, 63C, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it can be noted whether or not the period display is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved in the process before the period display is executed.

(17) In the gaming machine of (16),
The special effect is a suggestion display that suggests that the predetermined display is executed after execution of the special effect (as shown in FIG. 63B, the timer frame 9097 is displayed in a hidden manner in the first area 9091. This suggests that the timer display 9094 is executed).

  According to such a configuration, it can be noted whether or not the period display is executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved in the process before the period display is executed.

(18) In the gaming machine of (16) or (17),
The special effects can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable display (as shown in FIG. 66, the special effects can be executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of change or before the start of reach, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it can be noted at which timing the special effect is executed.

(19) In the gaming machine of (18),
Depending on the timing of execution of the special effect, the proportion of execution of the predetermined display after the execution of the special effect is different (as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, execution of the first area effect is performed at the time of loss and the big hit time). The selection ratio of the timing is different, and the selection ratio of the timer effect in the first area effect is different at the time of losing and the big hit, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to which timing the special effect is executed.

(20) In any of the gaming machines (17) to (19),
The specific effect execution means can execute one of a plurality of types of special effects (as shown in FIG. 66, a white timer frame 9097 is displayed as a timer frame 9097 that is hidden and displayed during the special effect. Any one of a plurality of types of special effects such as a special effect and a special effect displaying a red timer frame 9097 can be executed).

  According to such a configuration, it can be noted which kind of special effect is executed.

(21) In the gaming machine of any of (17) to (19),
The display form of the predetermined display is a second predetermined display with a high expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as compared with the first predetermined display form and the first predetermined display form (white timer numerical value display form, etc.). Display mode (red timer numerical value display mode, etc.),
The display mode of the suggestion display includes the first predetermined display mode (white timer frame display hidden display mode, etc.) that can be displayed before execution of the predetermined display according to the first predetermined display mode and the second predetermined display mode. Including a second suggestion display mode (such as a red timer frame display hidden display mode) that can be displayed before execution of the predetermined display,
The special effect execution means can execute the predetermined display according to the first suggestion display mode even before execution of the predetermined display according to the second predetermined display mode (as shown in FIG. 66, a red timer value). Even before execution of the display, it is possible to execute a hidden display showing the white timer frame).

  According to such a structure, even if the suggestion display by the 1st suggestion display mode is performed, the expectation to an advantageous state can be prevented from falling.

(22) In the gaming machine of any one of (16) to (21),
The predetermined display means is a period from when the predetermined display is started until the predetermined display becomes the specific mode (such as 0 seconds).
After the predetermined display is updated, the first pattern (see FIG. 64) having the specific mode without passing through a stop mode (such as the freeze effect shown in FIGS. 64B and 64C) for stopping the predetermined operation of the predetermined display. 64 (f) to (i) patterns),
After the predetermined display is updated, the second pattern (see FIG. 64) is used as the specific mode after passing through the stop mode (such as the freeze effect shown in FIGS. 64B and 64C) for stopping the predetermined operation of the predetermined display. 64 (a) to (e), etc.) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the period display in the period from when the period display is started until the period display becomes the predetermined mode.

(23) In the gaming machine of any one of (16) to (22),
The specific effect executing means can execute a special pattern for executing again the operation of the predetermined display by the predetermined display means when the predetermined display is in the specific mode (as shown in FIG. 66, SP The position of the third area 9096 can be changed depending on whether or not the reach is executed).

  According to such a structure, a player can be made to pay attention to the effect when a period display becomes a predetermined mode.

(24) In any one of the gaming machines (16) to (23),
The specific effect execution means can change the display mode of the predetermined display depending on whether or not the special effect is being executed during a period from when the predetermined display is started until the predetermined display becomes the specific mode. Yes (as shown in FIG. 66, the position of the third region 96 can be changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is executed).

  According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by taking into consideration the situation of the effects performed during the period from when the period display is started until the period display becomes a predetermined mode.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a fluctuation category and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a button development effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio etc. of a button development effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of a button development effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of various periods in a button development effect, and a specific button development effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of a specific button development effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of a specific button development effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an auto button setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode in the case of setting a function of an auto button to valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an auto button function. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the pending | holding storage buffer in the microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a timing chart which shows the production execution timing of the 1st example of a timer production. It is a display screen figure which shows the effect image of the 3rd effect when a timer effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation effect selection table of a 4th super reach timer effect selection table, the operation effect selection table of the 1st effect, the operation effect selection table of the 2nd effect, and the operation effect selection table of the 3rd effect. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern selection table which selects the effect pattern of 3rd effect in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer effect process performed when performing a timer effect in the process during effect design change (S90802). It is a figure for demonstrating area | region production. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the various effects in 4th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the “winnings”, a winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as a “starting winning”, and in particular, a winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as a first starting prize. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a decorative symbol executed in the first special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 5 (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display is established.

  Based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the second special figure holding memory number (described later). ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), a decorative symbol executed in the second special symbol game (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B or the image display device 5 (described later). A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbols is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start prize is generated. When the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the fact that the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start prize for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbols is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated. If the second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, that the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. In the case where the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. That is, when simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”, one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number Or it may refer to three. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area in the game board 2. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol” or “special symbol 1”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. (Special figure) is also referred to as “second special figure” or “special figure 2”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display.

  Note that when there is no particular distinction between the first hold display and the second hold display, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”. Further, the expression “hold display” may refer to the operation itself (LED lighting control by the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B) or the display itself (display by LED). . For example, the hold display when it is said that a hold display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to “hold display” in the start winning memory display area 5H (described later) and “active display” (described later) in the active display area AHA (described later).

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol change starts in conjunction with (corresponds to) the special symbol game, and the finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. . The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5L is also referred to as the left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5C is also referred to as the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5R is also referred to as the right symbol. The variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning storage display area 5H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. In other words, when the number of special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new start condition, a new hold display is made so that it is digested in order from the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H (the closest side of the active display area AHA). May be added. When the number of held special figure games decreases due to the establishment of a new start condition, the held display displayed on the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H (the held display displayed from the oldest) is deleted. When there is another hold display, the other hold display (each other hold display when there are a plurality of other hold displays) is moved (shifted) to the left side.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a digestion display area, etc.) AHA is arranged. In the active display area, active display (also referred to as digestion display, current display, etc.) is performed based on the fact that the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, when the start condition is satisfied, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA, and the active display is displayed. Hereinafter, an active display that is displayed based on the fact that a certain hold display M is deleted may be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged on the left side of the start winning storage display area 5H, but the active display area AHA is one of the display areas of the image display device 5. What is necessary is just to be arrange | positioned in the position.

  An upper plate and a lower plate are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished.

  A movable accessory (movable body) that operates as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example illustrated in FIG. 1, the upper position of the image display device 5 is changed from the first position (the initial position illustrated in FIG. 1) to the second position (the lower end position, for example, the position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5). A movable accessory 17 is provided that can move up to a distance.

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 17, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is placed on the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as a lamp 9.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17 described above are effects devices that perform effects. However, the gaming machine 1 may have other effects such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower. An apparatus may be provided.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), for example, a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per ordinary symbol (per ordinary symbol)”. " On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, for example, the variable symbol display result of “normal symbol losing (normal Design loss). Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special game is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the second special figure game is started. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols in the first special game and the second special game may be used as the jackpot symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state is an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines a round (also referred to as “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”. Is executed (number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to change the state of the big winning opening (open state, closed state). For example, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, changes the grand prize opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the grand prize opening in the open state, and then closes the grand prize opening door. The grand opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed. In the round, whether the prize winning opening has a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 29 seconds) after the opening of the prize winning opening door or whether a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winnings to the prize winning opening occurs. It is kept open until any condition is met.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes rounds in the jackpot gaming state until the number of rounds reaches a predetermined upper limit. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the round even if the number of executions of the round has not reached the predetermined maximum number of times, because the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won the big prize opening). May be terminated. In the present embodiment, the predetermined upper limit number of times is two types (8 times corresponding to 8R, 16 times corresponding to 16R, see FIG. 7), but may be one type or three or more types. May be.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the special game. In addition, there may be a reach state during a period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to stop display of fixed decorative symbols. The reach state is a decorative design that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. The production in the reach state is called reach production.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”).

  Note that the expected degree of jackpot for a certain performance is, for example, (probability that the performance will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) / {(probability of the effect being executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (Probability that the effect will be executed at times other than the jackpot) × (Probability that the jackpot will not be hit)}. In addition, when a certain effect is executed and “big hit” is always obtained, the big hit expectation degree of the effect is “1”. The same applies to the degree of expectation of super reach by a certain production.

  Reach production is an announcement that suggests to players that the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, but in addition to the reach production, the Pachinko machine 1 will also inform the player that the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, A suggestion effect (for example, a hold effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) can be executed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute an effect (for example, a hold effect, a slide effect, etc.) that gives a notice or suggestion to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect is executed. In the following, there is a case in which any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect is likely to be executed or the effect that predicts or suggests to the player that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high is collectively referred to as the notice effect.

  Note that the notification (notification or suggestion) by the notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notice content is realized. For example, the notice effect that notifies the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state) is entered. In addition, the notice effect that notifies the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” may be performed before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is displayed. Also referred to as target variable display. The active display corresponding to the target hold display (active display displayed during target variable display) is also referred to as target active display.

  The display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of winning a prize, may be determined at the time of the hold display (before the active display is yet), or when the active display is performed (at the start of the change) You may decide to. The display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active corresponding to the hold display (the active display displayed by deleting the hold display) may be the same (or substantially the same), They may be related to each other. The display mode being the same (or substantially the same) means that, for example, an active display having the same or substantially the same display mode as that of the hold display before erasure is displayed.

  The display modes are related to each other, for example, there are three types of display modes (expectation level of display mode a> expected level of display mode b> expectation level of display mode c) as the display mode of hold display. In addition, three types of display modes having different jackpot expectations as active display modes (expected degree of display mode s> expected level of display mode t> expected level of display mode u, where display mode s is display mode a, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b, and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b, and c). When the hold display is deleted, the active display of the display mode s is displayed, when the hold display of the display mode b is deleted, the active display of the display mode t is displayed, and when the hold display of the display mode c is deleted, it is displayed. It is that the active display of like u is displayed. In addition, when an after-addition active display effect is executed, when the hold display of the display mode a is deleted, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed, and the hold display of the display mode b is deleted. When activated, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, a hold effect according to the display mode of the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H can be executed. For example, in the holding effect, the holding display added to the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a notice mode (blue or red in this embodiment) different from the normal mode (white in this embodiment) (holding when added) Effects) and effects (holding change effects) that change the already-displayed hold display to the notice mode (including changes from one notice mode to another notice mode).

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is an effect executed when the hold display is changed to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to directly display the hold display or An effect that acts indirectly (holding action effect, sometimes referred to as a “holding action success effect” in distinction from a “holding action failure effect” described later) may be executed. Further, an effect (holding action failure effect) that is executed when the hold action success effect and at least a part of the effect modes are common and the hold display is not changed to the notice mode may be executable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be executable as the notice effect (or the prefetching notice effect). The active display effect includes, for example, an effect of displaying an active display to be added to the active display area AHA in a notice mode when the hold display at the time of erasure is in a normal mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or display in a normal mode An effect (active display change effect) that changes the active display being changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode) is included. In addition, when there is no particular distinction between the hold change effect and the active display change effect, it may be referred to as “change effect such as hold”.

  In addition, when the active display effect can be executed, the hold action success effect is executed when the active display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to make the active display. It may be an effect that acts directly or indirectly. Similarly, the hold action failure effect may be an effect that is executed when the active display is not changed to the notice mode.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the concealment effect which conceals the hold display in the start winning memory | storage display area 5H can be performed. The concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold display. For example, in the concealment effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display to such an extent that even the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H cannot be recognized at all (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front (upper layer)) It is difficult to see because it is generally silhouetted and is difficult to see, and a concealing image is displayed on the front, partially obstructing and difficult to see, and the hold display itself is difficult to see (becomes smaller and translucent). Or the like (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface and is completely invisible, or completely invisible due to transparency or non-display). Moreover, although the number of on-hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is somehow recognizable (for example, by a silhouette), it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize each display mode. . Moreover, although the display mode can be recognized, it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the number. For example, the presence or absence of a hold display (for example, a red hold display) in a certain display mode may be notified. Further, in the case of the hold display in which the notice mode is expressed in part (for example, the upper part) instead of the whole, the concealment effect makes it difficult to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. Or it may be an effect that makes it impossible.

  Further, the concealment effect may conceal the active display in the active display area AHA instead of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. After the end of 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control (time reduction control).

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probability variation control is not performed. The probability variation control is performed when a special game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the probability variation number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

  In addition, by performing the time reduction control, the variable symbol variable display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to when the time reduction control is not performed. Time-shortening control is when a special game is executed a predetermined number of times shortly after the end of the big hit gaming state or when the variable display result is “big hit”. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (ordinary time change time) in the normal game to be shorter than that in the case where the time reduction control is not performed. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per symbol”, the control for improving the probability that the variable display result is “per symbol”, compared to the case where the time control is not performed. The game ball receives the second starting prize, such as a control that makes the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece longer than when the time-short control is not performed, and a control that increases the number of tilts compared to when the time-short control is not performed. Control that is advantageous for the player is performed by facilitating passage (entrance) through the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability variation state. The short time state (high base state) and the high probability state (probability variation state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A gaming state in which time-shortened control or high-opening control is performed together with probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is both highly accurate state (probability variation state) and high base state (time-short state) is a highly accurate high base state or a time variation probability variation state. Also called. A gaming state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short-time control or the high opening control is not performed, that is, the gaming state that is in the high-probability state (probability variation state) but not in the high base state (time-short state) is the high probability low base state. Or it is also called a short-term uncertain change state. Note that only the high-accuracy high-base state (short-time accurate variation state) may be referred to as a “probability variation state”. A gaming state in which short-time control or high-opening control is performed without probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is not in a high probability state (probability variation state) but in a high base state (short time state) is also referred to as a low probability high base state. Is done. A gaming state in which neither time-change control nor high-open control is performed without probability variation control, that is, a game state that is neither in a high-probability state (probability variation state) nor in a high base state (time-short state) is also referred to as a low probability low base state. Is done. The low accuracy low base state is a normal state in which neither the accuracy variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed. It may be referred to as “normal state”. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state after the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system is reset) is a normal state.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when probability variation control is being performed, when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided in which probability variation control is continued until the next big hit. When the probability variation big hit that continues the probability variation control until the next big hit is provided, a normal big hit that is not subjected to the probability variation control after the end may be further provided.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. 9 and various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the movable accessory 17 are mounted.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed. The accessory control board 16 is a control board for controlling the action of an accessory provided separately from the effect control board 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A circuit for outputting a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. Further, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and an ordinary diagram hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or may be three or more. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each presentation control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area. Thereafter, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and the effect control command set as described above is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted.

  A part of FIG. 3A will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of the first special figure game. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command B100H is a first start port winning notification command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied (sometimes referred to as a first start port winning designation command or a first start port winning command). The command B200H is a second start port winning notification command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second start port winning designation command). , Sometimes referred to as a command at the time of the second start opening prize).

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory count. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number. For example, when the first start winning is generated (when the first special figure reserved memory number is increased), the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted together with the first start opening prize notification command. Further, when the second start winning is generated (when the second special figure reserved memory number is increased), the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted together with the second start opening prize notification command.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as a winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a “variation category command”) indicating a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 15), except for some cases (for example, when there is a first starting winning in a high base state or the like) when a starting winning occurs, the variable category The variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 displays the variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the start prize is generated. Or not.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the processing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted (updated) on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of the random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” and “PA2-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the variation category “PB1”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  A part of FIG. 5 will be described. For example, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 sets the special figure display result to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result before the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game is derived and displayed. It is a table that is referred to for making a decision based on it. In the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination values (for special figure display result determination) assigned to each special figure display result (“big hit”, “losing”). The number of numerical values to be compared with the random number value MR1 is made different. According to the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more determination values are assigned to “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. In other words, the probability of “big hit” is increased when the state is highly accurate compared to when the state is low.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7 determines whether the jackpot type is to be one of a plurality of types when determining to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It is a table referred in order to determine based on the random value MR2. In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, it is determined whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure (that is, whether the first special figure game is executed or the second special figure game). The number of determination values (numerical values compared with the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type) assigned to each big hit type (“16R probability changing big hit”, “8R probability changing big hit”) is different. It is According to the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure (when the second special figure game is executed), compared to when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure. Many judgment values are assigned to “16R probability variation big hit” (when the first special figure game is executed). That is, in the second special figure game, the probability of being “16R probability variable big hit” is higher when the “big hit” is obtained than in the first special figure game.

  The ROM 101 also includes a variation category determination table that is referred to for determining a variation category as one of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern that is referred to for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. A decision table is stored.

  The RAM 102 holds various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control data holding area provided in the RAM 102. For example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided in the RAM 102 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a hold specific information storage unit 151C, a general figure hold storage unit 151D, and a game. A control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A stores hold data (first hold information) of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random values extracted from the circuit 104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3) is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). To do.

  The second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores hold data (second hold information) of the second special figure game. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random values extracted from the circuit 104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3) is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). .

  The holding specific information storage unit 151C is a winning order of the entire holding data including the holding data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A and the holding data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B ( In association with the hold number which is the detection order of the game balls), the hold data (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the hold data (second hold information) based on the occurrence of the second start prize Is stored. In the hold specific information storage unit 151C illustrated in FIG. 14, “first” indicates that it is first hold information, and “second” indicates that it is second hold information.

  The usual figure hold storage unit 151D stores the hold information of the usual figure game. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151D determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 126 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  The ROM 121 also has a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, and the like). Data to be configured is stored. Each production control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents of various production operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, various production operations are realized by setting production control patterns. For example, the decorative display variable display operation corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. The hold effect, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during the opening, the effect during the closing), the ending effect, and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and an end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer. And the judgment value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is preset. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. In other words, data indicating the switching timing of the production control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the push button 31B is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating the operation mode of the movable accessory 17. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 17. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. In the effective period (sometimes simply referred to as the effective period), an operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is received and control for determining the production content is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a rendering device that is not a control target even though it corresponds to the rendering control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect device (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. Control of movable accessory 17 etc. is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data #n Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n indicating the content of control of the production operation in the apparatus and designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the accessory control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. Let On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  FIG. 10A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 122. For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A is provided in the RAM 122 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening prize designation command or second starting opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command , A set of four commands called a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start area winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. The category command and the stored memory number notification command are stored in this order. The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) each time variable symbol display is started. Is deleted from the stored contents, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the prefetch notice buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The prefetch notice buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A. In other words, in the prefetching notice buffer 194B, the contents of determination regarding the prefetching notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. . For example, when pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the start winning reception command buffer 194A due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., in the prefetch notice buffer 194B The contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, when the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start winning reception command buffer 194A due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the reading preview buffer 194B, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step) S12).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S12, the CPU 103 executes predetermined information output processing, for example, jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Are output (step S13).

  Following the information output process of step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the game random number update process in step S14, for example, at least a part of game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 to MR5) used on the main board 11 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 by software.

  Following the game random number update process in step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol process (step S16). By executing the normal symbol process, the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) of the normal symbol display 20 is controlled to change the normal symbol variable display and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables the tilting operation setting.

  Subsequent to the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the first special figure holding memory number (the first special figure game holding number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (start "1" is set to (mouth buffer value) (step S207). Subsequent to the processing in step S207, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 14) (step S208), and sets (clears) “0” in the start port buffer value (step S209).

  If it is determined in step S201 that the first start-up switch 22A is not on (step S201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure holding memory number has reached the upper limit value, (Step S202 (YES)) After executing the processing of Step S209, the CPU 103 receives the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S203). When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the second special figure hold memory number (the second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  When it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (start "2" is set to (mouth buffer value) (step S210). Subsequent to the processing of step S210, the CPU 103 executes a start winning time process (FIG. 14) (step S211), sets (clears) “0” to the start port buffer value (step S212), and starts a winning determination process. Exit.

  When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is not ON (step S203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure holding memory number has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204 (YES)), the start winning determination process is terminated without performing the processes of steps S210, S211 and S212.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13, even if the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B detect the start winning of the game ball at the same time, the processing based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first updates the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value by 1 (step S <b> 215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154 The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B. In addition, information corresponding to the start port buffer value is stored in the hold specific information storage unit 151C.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a start port winning notification command corresponding to the start port buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first start port winning notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second start port winning notification command is performed. The start opening prize notification command set in step S219 is obtained by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S220). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first reserved memory number notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second reserved memory number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process is terminated. Note that the reserved memory count notification command set in step S221 is executed, for example, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of winning random number determination processing (step S220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 15A, the CPU 103 first identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game state is a big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and identifies that the big hit flag is not the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on (when it is off). Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is on, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not on (when the high base flag is off). . Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 may identify whether the state is the high-predicted state or the low-predicted state by checking the state of the high-predictive flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and identifies the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not on (when it is off). May be.

  Note that the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to the on state in the big hit end process (step S117). Further, the CPU 103 clears the high base flag to an off state in the special symbol stop process (step S113). For example, the CPU 103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation number counter that is compared with the number of times reduced in the big hit end process, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter when there is a loss in the special symbol stop process. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches the short time count, the high base flag is cleared to the off state. Further, the CPU 103 sets the high-accuracy flag to the on state in the big hit end process. Further, the CPU 103 clears the high-accuracy flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process. For example, the CPU 103 sets an initial value of zero to the variation counter that is compared with the ST count in the big hit end process, and updates (counts up) the value of the variation counter when there is a loss in the special symbol stop process. At the same time, when the value of the variation counter reaches the high accuracy count, the high accuracy flag is cleared to the off state. Note that the value of the variation counter is stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  Following the processing of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state (step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game state is a big hit gaming state in the process of step S401. When it is determined in step S402 that the game state is not the big hit game state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S401.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the game state is a big hit game state (step S402; YES), or if it is determined in step S403 that the state is a high base state (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value. Is determined to be “2” (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start prize (start prize where the variation special chart is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S404; NO), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not in the high base state (step S403 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404 (YES)), The CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S405). Specifically, when the CPU 103 is not in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the low-accuracy state (the value in the range of “8000” to “8329” is “big hit”) from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. When the table data assigned to the special figure display result is set and is in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the high-accuracy state (“8000” to “8818” is displayed from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special figure display result with the range value “big hit” is set, and the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and the high-accuracy flag is When it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified that the state is in a low probability state, and different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the case of using the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table), when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table is used to If the buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S405, the CPU 103 determines that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not there is (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with each determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 determines the minimum value (lower limit value) of the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. ) And the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the range of the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S406 that it is within the big hit determination range (step S406; YES), the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. The big hit type is determined based on the numerical data (step S407). Specifically, first, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified by the start port buffer value. Set (select) a big hit type determination table. Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data corresponding to the fluctuation special map from the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type with the determination value of each big hit type in the big hit type determining table data set in accordance with the fluctuation special figure. Thus, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 may be determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step S407, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process of step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S406; NO), a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the loss to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S406). S409). Note that the symbol designating command set in step S409 is executed mainly by executing the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process processing is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  After executing the process of step S408 or the process of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base state is set (step S410). When it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is not set (step S410; NO), that is, in the case of the scene 1 or the scene 3, the CPU 103 uses the low base state for the special figure display result. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S411). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S410 that the state is the high base state (step S410; YES), that is, in the case of the scene 2 or the scene 4, the CPU 103 determines the high base state according to the special figure display result. A variable category determination table is set (selected) (step S412).

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 16A shows a selection example in which any of the variation category determination tables is selected from a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the low base state. According to FIG. 16A, when the special figure display result is “lost” in the low base state, three types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” “C -TBL2 "" C-TBL3 "), one of the variation category determination tables is selected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1, the variable category determination table “C-TBL1” is selected, and when the number of reserved memories is 2 or 3, The variation category determination table “C-TBL2” is selected, and when the number of reserved storage is four or more, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is selected. Further, according to FIG. 16A, when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state, one type of variable category determination table (“C-TBL4” in the figure) is used regardless of the number of reserved memories. ) Is selected.

  FIG. 16B shows a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the high base state. According to FIG. 16B, when the special figure display result is “lost” in the high base state, two types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” “C -TBL3 "), one of the variation category determination tables is selected. Further, according to FIG. 16B, when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the high base state, one type of variable category determination table (“C-TBL5” in the figure) is used regardless of the number of reserved memories. ) Is selected.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. FIG. 17A is the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B. FIG. 17A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (a variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B), a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. The variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D) and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” in FIG. 17E are also the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. ) Are assigned to multiple types of variable categories.

  For example, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is 0. 70 items (values in the range of “0” to “69”) are assigned to the change category “PA1”, and 27 items (values in the range of “70” to “96”) are assigned to the change category “PA2”. Assigned to the fluctuation category “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the fluctuation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the fluctuation category “PA5”. It has been. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  The variation category determination table “C-TBL2” illustrated in FIG. 17B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” illustrated in FIG. 17C, and the variation category determination table “C” illustrated in FIG. -TBL4 "and the variation category determination table" C-TBL5 "shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of step S411 executed when it is determined that the high base state is not determined in step S410, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” in step S406, and the variable category determination table. If the table data constituting “C-TBL4” is set, and it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL1” to the variable category determination according to the number of reserved storage Table data constituting any one of the tables “C-TBL3” is set. In step S412, which is executed when it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is set, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” in step S406. When the table data constituting the determination table “C-TBL5” is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” or the variation Table data constituting any of the category determination table “C-TBL3” is set.

  After executing the process of step S411 or the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines (determines) the variation category based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the change category extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14, and the change category set in step S411 or step S412. It is only necessary to determine which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 by comparing the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories in the table data of the determination table. Subsequent to the process in step S413, the CPU 103 transmits one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the determination result (determination result) in the process in step S413. After setting for this (step S414), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S101), the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. (See FIG. 12).

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining a variation pattern, a setting process for transmitting a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), and the like. Yes. In the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation process, the special symbol is varied (variably displayed) in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the start of variation is changed to the special symbol variation time (FIG. 5). It includes a process for determining whether or not it has been reached. In the special symbol variation process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3” when the elapsed time after the variation starts reaches the special symbol variation time.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the special symbol variation, and the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), or the big hit flag is turned off. (If the variable display result is preliminarily determined to be “lost” in the special symbol normal process (step S110)), a process for changing the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a process to be executed, Includes a setting process for sending a hit start command (fanfare command) as a process to be executed when is on (when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”) . In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and when the big hit flag is on, the special figure process flag is updated. Is updated to “4”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes a process for setting the grand prize opening to be in an open state (for example, setting a solenoid driving signal for the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door to open the big prize opening) , Including a setting process for transmitting a command for notifying a prize winning opening. In the big hit release pre-processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process in step S115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big prize opening has passed a predetermined time, whether or not the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached a predetermined number. Processing for determining the timing for returning the winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and setting for closing the big winning opening (for example, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door for closing the winning opening) For example, setting of a solenoid driving signal) and setting processing for transmitting a notification command after opening a special prize opening. In the big hit release processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. After the big hit opening process, the process of determining whether the number of executions of the round with the grand prize opening in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening is not reached Including processing to send a notification command during the opening of a special prize opening as processing to be executed, and setting processing to send a hit end designation command as processing to be executed when the maximum value of the number of special prize opening is reached It is out. In the post-hit opening process, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the maximum number of times of opening of the big winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process of step S117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is a process to determine whether or not the big hit end stage waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the ending stage execution period) has passed, or a process to be executed when the big jackpot end stage waiting time has passed This includes processing for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a highly accurate and high-base state, processing for setting the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the like. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  The big hit release process (step S115), the big hit release post-process (step S116), the big hit pre-release process (step S114), and the big hit end process (step S117) are awarded when the count switch 23 is turned on. It includes a transmission setting for transmitting the oral winning notification command.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process (step S110). In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of reserved memories is “0” (step S230). For example, in the process of step S230, the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the total number of reserved memories is other than “0” in step S230 (step S230; NO), it is determined whether or not the first held data (the first held data) is the second held information. Determination is made (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, it is determined whether or not the information stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the hold specifying information storage unit 151C is information indicating that the hold information is the second hold information. What is necessary is just to judge.

  When the hold data digested first in step S231 is the second hold information (step S231; YES), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). In the process of step S233, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter by one. Subsequent to the processing in step S233, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the hold data first digested in step S231 is not the second hold information (step S231; NO), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). In the process of step S237, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. Following the processing of step S237, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S238, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set the special figure display result determination table in the same manner as step S405 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special figure based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, the CPU 103, like step S406 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. In the table display result determination table data, compare each individual judgment value assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result to determine whether the special figure display result (“big hit” or “lost”) ) Should be determined.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined in step S241 that the game is a “hit” (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state (step S242). Note that the big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S117. Following the process of step S242, the CPU 103 executes a jackpot type determination process (S244). The jackpot type determination process in step S244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S407 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S244, the CPU 103 stores the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, for example, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S244. A jackpot type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244 is stored. As an example, if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process in step S244 is “16R probability variable big hit”, the CPU 103 sets “1” in the big hit type buffer value, and if “8R probability variable big hit”, the big hit type Set “2” to the buffer value.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241 (NO)), or after executing the process of step S245, the CPU 103 displays the special figure display result determined in the process of step S240, In the case of a big hit, a confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in the process of step S244 (step S248). After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

  When the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S230 (step S230; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S250) is executed, and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (step S111). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation category and processes the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation category in the same manner as the processing in step S413 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. A determination table is selected (set), and a variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when determining the variation category “PA2”, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA2” shown in FIG. 19B, and sets a random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. When the numerical data shown is within the range of “0” to “39”, the variation pattern “PA2-1” is determined, and when the numerical data is within the range of “40” to “99”, the variation pattern “PA2-2” is determined. . Further, for example, when the variation category “PA3” is determined, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA3” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating is in the range of “0” to “79”, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” is determined, and when the numerical data is in the range of “80” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is determined. To do. The same applies when other variable categories are determined.

  According to FIGS. 5, 6, 16, 17, and 19, the relationship between the normal reach and the super reach jackpot expectation is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach. Also, in normal reach, the expectation of jackpot is higher in the case with pseudo-continuous fluctuation than in the case without pseudo-continuous fluctuation. In Super Reach α (same for Super Reach β), the expectation of big hit is higher in the case of pseudo-ream fluctuation than in the case of no pseudo-reliable fluctuation. Expectation is higher than the case.

  Note that the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the process, or, like the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, step S217 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). The data may be extracted at step S232 to obtain pending data, which may be read out in step S232 (or step S236) of the special symbol normal process (step S110).

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) and the setting value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  When it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag and turns it off (step S73). Command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  Subsequent to the command analysis processing in step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes error notification processing (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control process processing (step S76). In the effect control process in step S76, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, and the like) are used based on the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11. Judgment, determination, setting, etc. related to the production operation that was performed are performed.

  Subsequent to the effect control process in step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect random number update process (step S77). In the effect random number update process in step S77, for example, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 may update the numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  It has been described that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 11 on the side of the effect control board 12 is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. However, the method for generating an interrupt for receiving a production control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S74). In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). When it is determined that there is no received command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  When it is determined in step S501 that there is a reception command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is a first start opening prize notification command (step S502). . The effect control CPU 120 may confirm the MODE data of the received command, for example, and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 3).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value set in advance as the reception waiting time for the first reserved memory number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is not the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a second start opening prize notification command. (Step S504). If it is determined in step S504 that the command is the second start opening prize notification command (step S504; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value, which is set in advance as a reception waiting time for the second reserved memory number notification command, in the command reception control timer.

  When it is determined in step S504 that the command is not the second start opening winning notification command (step S504; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). ). If it is determined in step S506 that the command is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the command is not a variable category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a first reserved memory number notification command (step S508). ). If it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the first pending storage count notification wait time Is cleared (step S509).

  When it is determined in step S508 that the command is not the first reserved memory number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command. (Step S510). If it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the second pending storage count notification waiting time Is cleared (step S511).

  If it is determined in step S506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S506 (YES)), if it is determined in step S507 that it is a variable category command (step S507 (YES)), step S503, step S505, After executing any of the processes of step S509 and step S511, the effect control CPU 120 stores the reception command at the head of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S512). Following the process of step S512, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. (Step S513). When it is determined that it is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 201 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). . Following the process of step S515, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to the other received commands (step S518). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the gaming state designation command and specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S518, the process returns to step S501.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S76). In the effect control process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the stored content in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, or determines whether or not a start opening winning notification command is received as a received command. Processing for determining various effects is executed.

  Following the winning effect determination process (step S150), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the processes of steps S170 to 177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the apparatus 5. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined to start the variable display of decorative symbols (that is, when a variation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (for example, setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 (for example, , Setting for performing a display operation such as a hold display and an active display, for example, a process for performing an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time) and a value of the fluctuation time timer) For example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect process, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the variable display start of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is the special figure variable time). And the like. In the effect processing during variable display, when the variable time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special symbol waiting process is executed when the confirmed decorative symbol is “losing”, when the game state setting process at the time of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, or when the fixed decorative symbol is “big hit” The process to be executed includes a process for performing a setting for performing a fanfare effect (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the waiting process per special figure, when the confirmed decorative symbol is “losing”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value, and when the confirmed decorative symbol is “big hit”, Update the value to “4”.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process for determining whether or not a big prize opening notification command is received, and a process that is executed when a big prize opening notification command is received (a special variable prize in each round). This includes a process for performing settings for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening). In the big hit starting process, when the big prize opening opening notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The in-round process is a process for determining whether or not a notification command after opening the big prize opening is received, or a process to be executed when a notification command after opening the big winning opening is received (a special variable prize in each round). This includes a process for performing settings for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the closed state (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closing). In the in-round processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” when the notification command after the special winning opening is received is received.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. Post-round processing is performed as a process for determining whether or not a winning prize opening notification command or a winning end designation command has been received, or a process to be executed when a winning prize opening notification command is received. Setting for performing an ending effect (for example, for an ending effect), for example, a process for performing a setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or a process to be executed when a hit end designation command is received. For example, setting a corresponding production control pattern and ending production execution time timer value). In the round post-processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” when a notification command during opening of a special winning opening is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” when a winning end designation command is received. To do.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. Whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the post-round processing (step S176) has timed out or not (whether the elapsed time after the start of execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time) And the like. In the post-hit end processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of winning effect determination processing (S150). In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S151), and uses the first start opening winning designation command as a new received command. Is determined (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 receives the second start opening prize designation command as a new reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (step S154). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the winning effect determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command is received (step S152; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time-short state (highly accurate high base state) is established (step S155). When it is determined that the time is not short (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S160). In the determination process for the hold effect, etc. in step S160 (same as the determination process for the hold effect, etc. in step S163), a process for determining the hold effect, the active display effect, the action effect (hold action failure effect, hold action failure effect, etc.) and the like. include. Details will be described later.

  After executing the hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination contents of the hold effect determination process (step S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 associates with the buffer content of the pre-read notice buffer 194B corresponding to the buffer number of the start winning in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, and the determination contents of the hold effect etc. determination processing Remember.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 adds a new hold display to the start winning storage display area 5H based on the determination content stored in step S161 (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect control pattern that causes the start winning memory display area 5H to display a hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described prefetch notice buffer 194B. Set as a usage pattern and determine in the hold effect determination process by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition is added to the start winning storage display area 5H. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command is received (step S154; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a time-short state (highly accurate high base state) (step S156). When it is determined that the time is short (highly accurate high base state) (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S163). The hold effect determination process in step S163 is the same as the hold effect determination process in step S160.

  After executing the hold effect determination process (step S163), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of step S163, step S164, and step S165, and ends the winning effect determination process. In addition, each process of step S163, step S164, and step S165 is the same as the process which concerns on each process of step S160, step S161, and step S162.

  When it is determined in step S155 that the time is short (step S155: YES), or when it is determined in step S156 that the time is not short (step S156: NO), a holding addition process according to the start opening prize designation is executed. (S166). Specifically, similar to the case where the presentation control CPU 120 determines not to execute the hold effect in the hold effect determination process (steps S160 and S163), a normal display mode (as a display mode after addition and after each shift) For example, information indicating white) is stored, and a hold display displayed in a normal display mode is added to the start winning storage display area 5H. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process (S171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, to display the special figure display result as “lost”. ] Is determined (step S522).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the missing combination ( Step S524). As an example, the effect control CPU 120 uses a random number or the like that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (for example, a random value for determining the left determined symbol, a random value for determining the right determined symbol, Numeric data indicating a fixed symbol determination or the like is extracted, and a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a left symbol determination table, a right symbol determination table, a medium symbol determination table, etc.) stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like ) And the like, the decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined as combinations of the fixed decorative symbols that constitute the lost combination.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is “big hit (16R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit)”, for effect control CPU120 determines the combination of the definite decoration symbol which comprises a jackpot combination (step S528). As an example, the CPU 120 for effect control extracts numerical data indicating a random number value (for example, a random value for determining a big hit determination symbol) updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the ROM 121 For example, by referring to a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a big hit fixed symbol determination table) stored in advance, etc., as combinations of the fixed decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative design that is finally stopped and displayed for each is determined. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination depending on which type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot) is present, and whether or not there is a promotion effect. Good.

  After performing either the process of step S524 or the process of step S528, the CPU 120 for effect control executes a button development effect determining process (step S529). The button development effect determination process includes a process for determining whether or not to execute a button development effect (described later), a process for determining an effect mode of the button development effect when it is determined to execute the button development effect, and the like. Details of the button development effect determination processing will be described later.

  After performing the process of step S529, the CPU 120 for effect control executes a pending digest process (step S530). Specifically, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA, and when there is another hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H, each is displayed. Move to the left.

  After executing the pending digest process in step S530, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control pattern set process (step S532). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the change pattern of the change as the use pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process in step S529 as a use pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect mode of the button development effect (for example, a button development effect pattern described later), etc. In the process in step S532, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process in step S529 is set as a usage pattern. As a result, in the variable display effect process (S172), the display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command and the determination content of the button development effect determination process (S532). (For example, see FIGS. 30 to 38).

  After executing the process of step S532, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer ( In step S535, the rendering device (production component) such as the image display device 5 is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time (special diagram variation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S537).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 digests the command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the start winning reception command buffer 194A and deletes it. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the received command is shifted while maintaining the winning order. In the process of step S538, the information stored in the prefetch notice buffer 194B provided in the RAM 122 or the like is deleted or shifted in accordance with the command deletion or shift. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S539), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  Hereinafter, the button development effect will be described in detail. The button development effect is an effect of changing (developing) an image (a button image simulating a push button 31B, a stick controller image simulating a stick controller 31A) corresponding to a button or the like (push button 31B, stick controller 31A). . Hereinafter, an image corresponding to a button or the like may be referred to as a “button or the like image” or “button or the like display”.

  The effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the image such as one type of button (for example, changes the display mode (display color, display size) of the button image) or the one type of button as the button development effect. The image is changed to another type of button image (for example, the button image is changed to a stick controller image).

  In the following description, as a button image or the like, a small-sized white button image imitating the push button 31B may be referred to as “small button (white)” or “first mode”. Further, a large-sized white button image simulating the push button 31B may be referred to as a “large button (white)” or a “second mode”. Further, a large-sized red button image simulating the push button 31B may be referred to as a “large button (red)” or a “third mode”. A stick controller image simulating the stick controller 31A may be referred to as a “stick” or a “fourth aspect”.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern in the present embodiment. The button development effect pattern indicates an effect mode (display mode) of the button development effect. The button development effect category is a name when button development effect patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the button development effect category is a group name of each group including one or more button development effect patterns categorized into a common group.

  In FIG. 25, “initial” is an initial display. “Final” is a final display. “Timing 1” is the first timing at which an image such as a button can change. “Timing 2” is a second timing at which an image such as a button can change. “Timing 3” is the third timing at which an image such as a button can change. Note that “timing 1”, “timing 2”, and “timing 3” may be different depending on the variation pattern.

  Also, in FIG. 25 (the same applies to other drawings), “no change” indicates that there is no change in the image such as a button. “Weak change” indicates that there is a one-step change (one-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, “weak change (first → second)” is a one-step change from “first mode” to “second mode”, that is, “small button (white)” to “large button (white)”. "". “Weak change (2 → 3)” is a one-step change from “2nd mode” to “3rd mode”, that is, a change from “large button (white)” to “large button (red)”. It means that there is. “Weak change (3rd to 4th)” indicates that there is a one-step change from “3rd mode” to “4th mode”, that is, a change from “large button (red)” to “stick”. ing. “Medium change” indicates that there is a two-stage change (two-stage change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, “medium change (first → third)” is a two-step change from “first mode” to “third mode”, that is, “small button (white)” to “large button (red)”. "". “Medium change (2 → 4)” indicates that there is a two-stage change from “second mode” to “fourth mode”, that is, a change from “large button (white)” to “stick”. ing. “Strong change” indicates that there is a three-stage change (three-stage change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, “strong change (first → fourth)” is a three-step change from “first mode” to “fourth mode”, that is, change from “small button (white)” to “stick”. It means that there is.

  In FIG. 25, in the button development effect category “BH1”, the image such as the button does not change at any of the three timings (timing 1, 2, 3), and “final” is “first mode (small button ( White)) ”button development effect category. The button development effect pattern “BH1-1” belongs to the button development effect category “BH1”.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH1-1”, since the button image does not change at any of timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3, the button image of the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” The first period (“initial”, ie, before “timing 1”), the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”), and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”) The period 4 (“final”, that is, after “timing 3”) is also the “first mode (small button (white))”.

  In the button development effect category “BH2”, the button or the like image changes slightly at any one of the three timings, and the “final” is “second mode (large button (white))”. This is an advanced production category. The button development effect category “BH2” includes a button development effect pattern “BH2-1” having a weak change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern “BH2-2” having a weak change at timing 2, and a weak at timing 3. The button development effect pattern “BH2-3” with change belongs.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1”, the button image changes slightly at the timing 1 and does not change at the timing 2 or 3, so the button image of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first mode (small button (white))” is selected, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”). 2 ”to“ timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”), the“ second mode (large button (white)) ”is set.

  In the button development effect category “BH3a”, the button or the like image changes slightly at any two of the three timings, and the “final” is “third mode (large button (red))”. This is an advanced production category. In the present embodiment, in the button development effect category “BH3a”, a button development effect pattern “BH3a-1” having a weak change at timing 1 and timing 3 and a button development effect pattern having a weak change at timing 2 and timing 3. “BH3a-2” belongs.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern “BH3a-1,” the button image changes slightly at timing 1 and timing 3 and does not change at timing 2. In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first mode (small button (white))” is selected, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”). “2” to “timing 3”) is “second mode (large button (white))”, and “fourth mode (after timing 3)” is “third mode (large button (red))”.

  The button development effect category “BH3b” is a button in which the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at any one of the three timings, and the “final” becomes the “third mode (large button (red))”. This is an advanced production category. The button development effect category “BH3b” includes a button development effect pattern “BH3b-1” having a medium change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern “BH3b-2” having a medium change at timing 2, and a middle at timing 3. The button development effect pattern “BH3b-3” with change belongs.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern “BH3b-1,” the button image changes middle at timing 1 and does not change at timing 2 or timing 3. In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first mode (small button (white))” is selected, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”). 2 ”to“ timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”), the“ third mode (large button (red)) ”is set.

  In the button development effect category “BH4a”, at any two of the three timings, the image of the button or the like changes medium at the previous timing, the image of the button or the like changes slightly at the later timing, and “final” This is a button development effect category that becomes the “fourth aspect (stick)”. In this embodiment, in the button development effect category “BH4a”, the button development effect pattern “BH4a-1” having a medium change at timing 1 and a weak change at timing 3, a medium change at timing 2, and a weak change at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern “BH4a-2”.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4a-1”, the image of the button or the like changes mediumly at timing 1, weakly changes at timing 3, and does not change at timing 2. Therefore, the button development effect pattern “BH4a-1” The image such as a button is “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period. In the period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”), the “third mode (large button (red))” is set, and in the fourth period (after “timing 3”), the “fourth mode (stick)” is set.

  In the button development effect category “BH4b”, in any two of the three timings, the image of the button or the like changes slightly at the previous timing, the image of the button or the like changes moderately at the later timing, and “final” This is a button development effect category that becomes the “fourth aspect (stick)”. In this embodiment, in the button development effect category “BH4b”, the button development effect pattern “BH4b-1” having a weak change at timing 1 and a medium change at timing 3, a weak change at timing 2, and a medium change at timing 3. The button development effect pattern “BH4b-2” belongs to.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4b-1,” the button image changes slightly at timing 1, changes medium at timing 3, and does not change at timing 2. The image such as a button is “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period. In the period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”), the “second mode (large button (white))” is set, and in the fourth period (after “timing 3”), the “fourth mode (stick)” is set.

  In the button development effect category “BH4c”, the image of the button or the like changes strongly at any one of the three timings (timing 3 in this embodiment), and “final” is “fourth mode (stick)”. ”Button development effect category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” having a strong change at timing 3 belongs to the button development effect category “BH4c”.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1”, the button image changes strongly at timing 3 and does not change at timing 1 or timing 2. In the first period (before “timing 1”), the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”), the “first mode (small button) (White)) ”and“ fourth mode (stick) ”in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the button development effect determination process (S529). FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect and the like. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. In FIG. 27A (the same applies to other figures), the fluctuation pattern “PA4-X” is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α (losing) (specifically, fluctuation patterns “PA4-1”, “PA4-”). 2 ”or“ PA4-3 ”). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-X” is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (losing) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns “PA5-1”, “PA5-2”, and “PA5-3”). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-X” is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α (big hit) (specifically, any one of fluctuation patterns “PB4-1”, “PB4-2”, and “PB4-3”). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-X” is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (big hit) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns “PB5-1”, “PB5-2”, and “PB5-3”).

  In the button development effect determination process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the button development effect (S550). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button development effect based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. .

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 5% when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach α (losing), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. In the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number value for determining whether or not the button development effect execution is performed (for example, the random value updated in the effect random number update process (S77)) are “no execution” and “execution”. It is only necessary to be assigned at a ratio of 5:95.

  Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 10% when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA5-X”. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect execution determination table for super reach β (losing), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA5-X”. In this table, numerical values to be compared with the random values for determining whether or not to execute button development effects should be assigned to “no execution” and “execution” at a ratio of 10:90.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a super-reach variation pattern (“PA4-X”, “PA5-X”, “PB4-X”, “PB5-X”). It is determined that the button development effect is not always executed when the variation pattern is other than (PA1-X, PA2-X, PA3-X, PB1-X, PB3-X).

  According to FIG. 27 (A), when the button development effect is executed, it is always super reach, and therefore the big hit expectation is higher when the button development effect is executed than when it is not executed.

  Further, when the button development effect is executed in the super reach α in the low probability state, the big hit expectation degree is (probability of “executed” in “PB4-X”) × (the low probability state. Sometimes “PB4-X”) / {(probability of “executed” in “PB4-X”) × (probability of “PB4-X” when in the low probability state) + (“PA4 -X "is the probability of being" executed ") x (probability of being" PA4-X "in the low probability state)}, and is about 18.5%. The probability of “executed” at “PB4-X” is 15%, and the probability of “executed” at “PA4-X” is 5% (FIG. 27A). Further, since the probability of hitting in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 6), the probability of being “PB4-X” in the low probability state is (1/199) × (30/100). There is a probability of “PA4-X” in the low probability state (198/199) × (2/100) (see FIGS. 16 and 17). On the other hand, the expectation degree of big hit when the super reach α is executed in the low-accuracy state is the probability of being “PB4-X” in the low-accuracy state / (“ The probability is “PB4-X” + the probability of being “PA4-X” in the low probability state), and is about 7%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in the super reach α, the big hit expectation is higher than the case where it is not executed.

  Further, when the button development effect is executed in the super reach β in the low probability state, the big hit expectation degree is (probability of “executed” in “PB5-X”) × (the low probability state. Sometimes “PB5-X”) / {(probability of “executed” in “PB5-X”) × (probability of “PB5-X” when in the low probability state) + (“PA5 -X "is the probability of being" executed ") x (probability of being" PA5-X "when in the low probability state)}, and is about 50%. The probability of “executed” at “PB5-X” is 40%, and the probability of “executed” at “PA5-X” is 10% (FIG. 27A). Further, since the probability of hitting in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 6), the probability of becoming “PB5-X” in the low probability state is (1/199) × (50/100). There is a probability of “PA5-X” in the low probability state (198/199) × (1/100) (see FIGS. 16 and 17). On the other hand, the expectation degree of big hit when super reach β is executed in the low probability state is the probability of being “PB5-X” in the low accuracy state / (“ The probability is “PB5-X” + the probability of being “PA5-X” when the state is in a low probability state), and is about 20%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in the super reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the button development effect is not executed.

  Returning to FIG. After executing the process of step S550, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the button development effect in the process of step S500 (S551). When it is determined not to execute the button development effect (step S551; NO), the button development effect determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the button development effect (step S551; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category (S552). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 27B based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command.

  For example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category “BH1” at a rate of 30%, and determines the button development effect category. “BH2” is determined at a rate of 20%, button development effect category “BH3a” is determined at a rate of 20%, button development effect category “BH3b” is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category “BH4a” is determined. ”Is determined at a rate of 10%, the button development effect category“ BH4b ”is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category“ BH4c ”is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach α (losing), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. In the table, numerical values to be compared with random number values for determining the button development effect category (for example, the random value updated in the effect random number update process (S77)) are “BH1”, “BH2”, and “ BH3a "," BH3b "," BH4a "," BH4b ", and" BH4c "may be allocated at a ratio of 30: 20: 20: 10: 10: 10: 0.

  Further, for example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA5-X”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category “BH1” at a rate of 0%, and develops the button development effect. The category “BH2” is determined at a rate of 30%, the button development effect category “BH3a” is determined at a rate of 20%, the button development effect category “BH3b” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the button development effect category “ “BH4a” is determined at a rate of 15%, the button development effect category “BH4b” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category “BH4c” is determined at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach β (losing), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA5-X”. In the table, numerical values to be compared with the random number value for determining the button development effect category are “BH1”, “BH2”, “BH3a”, “BH3b”, “BH4a”, “BH4b”, “BH4c”, and the like. May be allocated at a ratio of 0: 30: 20: 20: 15: 10: 5.

  According to FIG. 27B, in the super reach α, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH1” or “BH2” is the variation pattern “PB4”. -X "is higher than the variation pattern" PA4-X ". That is, in Super Reach α, the first mode (small button (white)) or the second mode (large button (white)) when the image of the button or the like finally changes to the fourth mode (stick). Expectation of big hit is higher than the case of stopping at In Super Reach β, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” or “BH4c” with respect to the determination ratio of the button expansion effect category “BH2” is the variation pattern “PB5-X”. Is higher than the variation pattern “PA5-X”. In other words, in Super Reach β, when the image of a button or the like finally changes to the fourth mode (stick), the big hit expectation is higher than when it stops in the second mode (large button (white)). In addition, although the relationship of the jackpot expectation degree has been described as super reach β> super reach α, according to FIG. 27B, the case of super reach β is greater than the case of super reach α. Images such as buttons are likely to change to the fourth mode. From the above, the big hit expectation degree of the fourth aspect (stick)> the big hit expectation degree of the third aspect (large button (red))> the big hit expectation degree of the second aspect (large button (red))> first aspect (small button) (White)).

  Further, according to FIG. 27B, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH3b” with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH3a” is the variation pattern “PB4-X”. It is higher than the case of “PA4-X”, and the case of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-X” is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern “PA5-X”. In other words, when “final” becomes the “third mode” by one medium change (two-stage change) (BH3b), “final” becomes “third” by two weak changes (one-stage change). The big hit expectation degree is higher than the case (BH3a).

  Further, according to FIG. 27B, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4c” with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” is the variation pattern “PB5-X”. Is higher than when the fluctuation pattern is “PA5-X”. In other words, when “final” becomes “fourth mode” by one strong change (three-step change) (BH4c), one weak change (one-step change) and one middle change (2 The jackpot expectation is higher than when “final” becomes the “fourth aspect” (BH4a, BH4b) due to the step change). Further, the determination rate of the button development effect category “BH4b” with respect to the determination rate of the button development effect category “BH4a” is greater when the variation pattern “PB4-X” is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. The variation pattern “PB5-X” is higher than the variation pattern “PA5-X”. That is, when “final” becomes the “third mode” in the order of weak change (1 step change) and medium change (2 step change) (BH4b), medium change (2 step change), weak change ( The big hit expectation degree is higher than the case (BH4a) in which “final” becomes the “third mode” in the order of (one step change).

  Returning to FIG. After executing the processing of step S552, the effect control CPU 120 determines one button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category determined in step S552 (S553).

  For example, if the button development effect category “BH2” has been determined in step S552, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 28B, the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command is the change pattern “ When it is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” is determined at a rate of 36%, the button development effect pattern “BH2-2” is determined at a rate of 33%, When the button development effect pattern “BH2-3” is determined at a rate of 31% and the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command is the change pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”, the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” is determined at a rate of 31%, button development effect pattern “BH2-2” is determined at a rate of 33%, To determine the emissions development effect pattern "BH2-3" at a rate of 36%. For example, in the ROM 121, a button development effect pattern for super-reach (loss) that is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”. A (BH2-X) determination table is stored, and a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining a button development effect pattern (for example, a random value updated in the effect random number update process (S77)) is stored in the table. , “BH2-1”, “BH2-2”, and “BH2-3” may be allocated at a ratio of 36:33:31. Further, a button development effect pattern (BH2-X) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. ) Determination table is stored, and in this table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number value for determining the button development effect pattern are 31:33 in “BH2-1”, “BH2-2”, and “BH2-3”. : What is necessary is just to be allocated by the ratio of 36.

  For example, when the button development effect category “BH3a” has been determined in step S552, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command is the change pattern as shown in FIG. When it is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, the button development effect pattern “BH3a-1” is determined at a rate of 55%, and the button development effect pattern “BH3a-2” is determined at a rate of 45%. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”, the button development effect pattern “BH3a-1” is determined at a rate of 45%, and the button development effect is obtained. The pattern “BH3a-2” is determined at a rate of 55%. For example, in the ROM 121, a button development effect pattern for super-reach (loss) that is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”. A (BH3a-X) determination table is stored, and in this table, a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining a button development effect pattern is a ratio of 55:45 between “BH3a-1” and “BH3a-2”. As long as it is assigned in Further, a button development effect pattern (BH3a-X for super reach) that is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. ) A determination table is stored, and numerical values to be compared with a random number value for determining a button development effect pattern are assigned to “BH3a-1” and “BH3a-2” at a ratio of 45:55. Just do it.

  If the button development effect category “BH1” has been determined in step S552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category “BH1” is one type (button development effect pattern “BH1-1”). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28A, the variation patterns designated by the variation pattern designation command are the variation patterns “PA4-X”, “PA5-X”, “PB4-X”, “PB5-X”. In any case, the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” is determined. If the button development effect category “BH4c” has been determined in step S552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category “BH4c” is one type (button development effect pattern “BH4c-1”). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (G), the variation patterns designated by the variation pattern designation command are the variation patterns “PA4-X”, “PA5-X”, “PB4-X”, “PB5-X”. In any case, the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” is determined.

  According to FIG. 28B, the determination rate of the button development effect category “BH2-3” with respect to the determination rate of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” is the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. Some cases are higher than the variation patterns “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”. Further, according to FIG. 28C, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH3a-2” with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern “BH3a-1” is the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. "Is higher than the variation pattern" PA4-X "or" PA5-X ". The same applies to FIGS. 28D to 28F. That is, the expectation for jackpot is higher when the change is made at a later timing than when the change is made at an earlier timing.

  Returning to FIG. After executing the process of step S553, the effect control CPU 120 determines an action effect such as a button (simply “action effect” in the drawing) (S554), and ends the button development effect determination process. Specifically, in the process of step S554, the effect control CPU 120 changes the image such as a button at each of timings 1 to 3 ("no change", "weak change", "medium change", "strong change"). ), The presence / absence of execution of the action effect such as a button (and the effect mode in the case of execution) is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  In the following description, as an action effect such as a button performed in the image display device 5, an effect in which a character appears (character appearance) is referred to as a “weak effect effect”, and an effect (cannon) in which artillery fire is performed is “ An effect with a lightning strike (lightning strike) may be referred to as a “strong action effect”.

  For example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is “no change”, the effect control CPU 120 sets “no action effect” to 70% as shown in FIG. The “weak effect effect” is determined at a rate of 20%, the “medium effect effect” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the “strong effect effect” is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button-like action effect determination table when no change is used, which is referred to when “no change”, and is compared with a random value for determining an action effect such as a button. It is only necessary that the numerical values are assigned to “no effect effect”, “weak effect effect”, “medium effect effect”, and “strong effect effect” at a ratio of 70: 20: 10: 0.

  Further, for example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is “weak change”, the effect control CPU 120 sets “no effect effect” to 20 as shown in FIG. %, A “weak action effect” is determined at a rate of 70%, a “medium effect effect” is determined at a rate of 8%, and a “strong action effect” is determined at a rate of 2%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button etc. effect presentation determination table at the time of a weak change, which is referred to when “weak change”, and is compared with a random value for determining the button effect presentation. It is only necessary that numerical values are assigned to “no effect effect”, “weak effect effect”, “medium effect effect”, and “strong effect effect” at a ratio of 20: 70: 8: 2.

  That is, in step S533, for example, when the button development effect pattern “BH4b-1” is determined, the timing 1 is “weak change”, the timing 2 is “no change”, and the timing 3 is “medium change”. (See FIG. 25), in the process of step S554, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “no effect effect” at a rate of 20% for the effect effect such as a button for the “weak change” at timing 1, "Direction" is determined at a rate of 70%, "Intermediate effect effect" is determined at a rate of 8%, and "Strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 2%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the “effect effect non-existence” at a rate of 70% and the “weak effect effect” at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button with respect to “no change” at the timing 2, The “medium effect effect” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the “strong effect effect” is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “no effect effect” at a rate of 5% and “weak effect effect” at a rate of 20% for an effect effect such as a button with respect to “medium change” at timing 3, The “medium effect effect” is determined at a rate of 55%, and the “strong effect effect” is determined at a rate of 20%. In step S533, for example, when the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” is determined, the timings 1 to 3 are all “no change” (see FIG. 25), but in the process of step S554, The effect control CPU 120 determines “no action effect” at a rate of 70% and “weak effect effect” at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button for each “no change” at the timings 1 to 3. Then, the “medium effect effect” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the “strong effect effect” is determined at a rate of 0%.

  According to FIG. 27 (C), when an action effect such as a button (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is executed, an image such as a button changes (weak change, medium change, Strong change). In addition, when a strong action effect is executed, the image of the button etc. always changes (weak change, medium change, strong change), and when a medium action effect is executed than when a weak action effect is executed. Images such as buttons are likely to change (weak change, medium change, strong change). In addition, when a strong effect effect is executed, it is easier to change than when a strong effect effect is not executed, and when a medium effect effect is executed, it is easier to change medium than when a medium effect effect is not executed When the weak action effect is executed, the change is more easily changed than when the weak action effect is not executed.

  As described above, in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect and the like is also set as the use pattern. Determination contents determined in the determination process (for example, (button development effect pattern), buttons and other effect effects effect modes (no effect effect, timing effect 1), “weak effect effect”, “medium effect effect”, In the step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), the RAM 122 or the like is referred to, and the effect control corresponding to the effect mode or the like of the button development effect is stored in the RAM 122 or the like. A pattern may also be set as a use pattern.

  FIG. 29A is an explanatory diagram for explaining various periods in the button development effect. Before describing FIG. 29A, “T1” to “T14” illustrated in FIGS. 29 to 38 will be described. “T1” represents the start timing of the fluctuation. “T14” represents the end timing of the fluctuation. “T2” represents the timing of reaching. “T3” represents the timing of development to super reach. Super reach developed from “T3” ends in “T13”. That is, “T13” represents the timing at which the result of super reach (win / loss etc.) is displayed (notified).

  “T4” represents the display start timing of an image such as a button. An image such as a button displayed from “T4” is erased to “T13”. That is, “T4” to “T13” are display periods of buttons and the like (display period of images such as buttons).

  “T6” represents “timing 1” in FIG. “T8” represents “timing 2” in FIG. “T10” represents “timing 3” in FIG. “T5” represents the start timing of the execution of the button effect production corresponding to the change of the button image, etc. (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 1 (T6). The action effect such as a button started at “T5” ends at “T6”. That is, “T5” to “T6” are the execution period of the button effect effect corresponding to the change of the button image, etc. at the timing 1. “T7” represents the timing of starting execution of an effect such as a button corresponding to a change in an image such as a button at timing 2 (T8). The action effect such as a button started at “T7” ends at “T8”. In other words, “T7” to “T8” are the execution period of the button effect effect corresponding to the change of the button image, etc. at the timing 2. “T9” represents the timing for starting execution of the button effect production corresponding to the change of the button image, etc. at timing 3 (T10). The action effect such as a button started at “T9” ends at “T10”. That is, “T9” to “T10” are the execution period of the button effect effect corresponding to the change of the button image, etc. at the timing 3. “T11” and “T12” will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, some periods (T11 to T13) of the button display periods (T4 to T13) are valid periods of the buttons and the like (push button 31B, stick controller 31A) (operation is valid). The other periods (T4 to T11) are non-valid periods (periods during which the operation is not valid) such as buttons. That is, “T11” represents a timing at which an operation of a button or the like becomes valid. During the ineffective period (T4 to T11), a “regulatory line” is displayed as an image for notifying that the ineffective period is being overlaid on an image such as a button. Note that the “regulation line” is not displayed during the effective period (T11 to T13). That is, the “regulation line” is deleted at “T11”.

  A period (T13 to T14) following the button display period (T4 to T13) is a period for displaying a result (win or loss). More specifically, when there is no operation during the effective period (T11 to T13), when the effective period ends (T13), the image such as the button is deleted, and the period following the display period such as the button (T13 to T14) ) Displays the result. On the other hand, if there is an operation during the effective period, the image such as a button is deleted when the operation is performed, and the result is displayed from the time when the operation is performed. If there is an operation during the effective period, the effective period ends when there is an operation. An effect that displays an image such as a button during the effective period (T11 to T13) and displays a result (win or loss) after the image such as a button is deleted may be referred to as an “operation effect”.

  Each of FIGS. 29B to 31B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific flow of button development effects.

(Specific example 1)
FIG. 29B shows the flow of button development effects in the first specific example. In the first specific example, it is assumed that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S529) (S550), determines the button development effect category “BH1” (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern “BH1”. -1 "is determined (S553)," No effect "is determined for the effect such as a button for timing 1 (" No change "for" BH1-1 ") (S554), and Timing 2 (" BH1-1 ") Then, “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for the button effect effect for “No change”) (S554), and “action effect” for the button 3 effect effect for timing 3 (“No change” for “BH1-1”) is determined. It is assumed that “No production” is decided. The determination content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” determined in the specific example 1, the button image is displayed in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) and in the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 1”). The “timing 2” / T6 to T8), the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), and the fourth period (after “timing 3” / T10 to T13) are small buttons (white). (Refer to FIG. 25) In addition, since the “regulation line” is displayed during the ineffective period (T4 to T11) in any of the button development effect patterns, in the first specific example, FIG. The button development effect is executed as follows. Further, in specific example 1, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 2 (no change), characters appear in “T7” to “T8”, but images such as buttons are not changed. (Failure production).

(Specific example 2)
FIG. 30A shows a flow of button development effects in the second specific example. In the second specific example, it is assumed that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S529) (S550), determines the button development effect category “BH2” (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern “BH2”. −1 ”is determined (S553),“ weak action effect ”is determined for the button and other action effects for timing 1 (“ BH2-1 ”is“ weak change (first → second) ”) (S554), and timing is determined. 2 (“No change” for “BH2-1”), “No effect” is determined for the effect such as the button (S554), and the button effect for timing 3 (“No change” for “BH2-1”). It is assumed that “weak effect production” is determined. The determination content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” determined in the specific example 2, the button image is “first mode (small button (white)” in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6). ) ”In the second period (“ timing 1 ”to“ timing 2 ”/ T6 to T8), the third period (“ timing 2 ”to“ timing 3 ”/ T8 to T10), and the fourth period (“ After “timing 3” / T10 to T13), the “second mode (large button (white))” is set (see FIG. 25), and any button development effect pattern is not valid (T4 to T11). In order to display the “regulation line”, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. Further, in the specific example 2, since the “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the characters appear in “T5” to “T6”, and images such as buttons are displayed in “T6”. The “first mode (small button (white))” is changed to the “second mode (large button (white))” (change in one step) (success effect). In the second specific example, since the “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined at the timing 3 (no change), the character appears at “T9” to “T10”, but the image of the button or the like is displayed at “T10”. Not changed (failed production).

(Specific example 3)
FIG. 30B shows a flow of button development effects in the third specific example. In specific example 3, it is assumed that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PB4-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S529) (S550), determines the button development effect category “BH3a” (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern “BH3a”. -2 "is determined (S553)," No effect "is determined for the effect such as a button for timing 1 (" No change "for" BH3a-2 ") (S554), and Timing 2 (" BH3a-2 " Then, “no action effect” is determined for the action effect such as a button for “weak change (first → second)” (S554), and “weak change (second → third) is selected at timing 3 (“ BH3a-2 ”). It is assumed that “weak action effect” is determined for the action effect such as the button for “)”. The determined content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH3a-2” determined in the specific example 3, the button image is displayed in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) or the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 1”). “Timing 2” / T6 to T8) is “first mode (small button (white))”, and “Third mode (large timing) / T8 to T10” is “second mode (large)”. Button (white)) ”and“ third mode (large button (red)) ”(see FIG. 25) in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”/ T10 to T13) (see FIG. 25). Even in the case of a pattern, a “regulation line” is displayed during the ineffective period (T4 to T11), and therefore, in Example 3, a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the third specific example, since “no action effect” is determined for the timing 2 (weak change), the characters such as the buttons are displayed in “T8” without displaying the characters in “T7” to “T8”. “Mode (small button (white))” is changed to “second mode (large button (white))” (one step change). In the third specific example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 3 (weak change), a character appears in “T9” to “T10”, and an image such as a button is displayed in “T10”. The “second mode (large button (white))” is changed to “the third mode (large button (red))” (change in one step) (success effect).

(Specific example 4)
FIG. 31A shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 4. In the fourth specific example, it is assumed that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PB5-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S529) (S550), determines the button development effect category “BH4b” (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern “BH4b”. −1 ”is determined (S553), and“ weak action effect ”is determined for the action effect such as a button for timing 1 (“ weak change (first → second) in “BH4b-1”) ”(S554). 2 (“No effect” for “BH4b-1”) is determined as “No effect” (S554). Timing 3 (“BH4b-1” indicates “medium change (second → fourth)”. It is assumed that “medium effect effect” is determined for the action effect such as the button for “)”. The determined content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4b-1” determined in the specific example 4, the image of the button is “first mode (small button (white)” in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6). ) ”In the second period (“ timing 1 ”to“ timing 2 ”/ T6 to T8) and the third period (“ timing 2 ”to“ timing 3 ”/ T8 to T10). Button (white)) ”and“ fourth mode (stick) ”(see FIG. 25) in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”/ T10 to T13) (see FIG. 25). In the specific example 4, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 31A in order to display the “regulation line” during the ineffective period (T4 to T11). Further, in the specific example 4, since the “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the characters appear at “T5” to “T6”, and images such as buttons are displayed at “T6”. The “first mode (small button (white))” is changed to the “second mode (large button (white))” (change in one step) (success effect). Further, in the specific example 4, since the “medium effect production (cannon)” is determined at the timing 3 (medium change), the cannons appear at “T9” to “T10”, and the images such as the buttons are displayed at “T10”. The “second mode (large button (white))” is changed to “the fourth mode (stick)” (changed in two steps) (success effect).

(Specific example 5)
FIG. 31B shows the flow of button development effects in Example 5. In the specific example 5, it is assumed that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PB5-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S529) (S550), determines the button development effect category “BH4c” (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern “BH4c”. -1 "is determined (S553)," No effect "is determined for the effect such as a button for timing 1 (" No change "for" BH4c-1 ") (S554), and Timing 2 (" BH4c-1 " “No effect” is determined for the button effect for “No change”) (S554), and the button effect for the timing 3 (“BH4c-1” is “strong change (1 → 4)”). It is assumed that “strong effect production” is determined.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” determined in the specific example 5, images of buttons and the like are displayed in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) or in the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 1”). In “timing 2” / T6 to T8) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “first mode (small button (white))” is set, and the fourth period (“ After “timing 3” / T10 to T13), it becomes “fourth mode (stick)” (see FIG. 25), and any button development effect pattern is “regulated” during the ineffective period (T4 to T11). In order to display the “line”, in Example 5, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. In Specific Example 5, since “strong action effect (lightning strike)” is determined for timing 3 (strong change), thunderclouds appear at “T9” to “T10”, and images such as buttons are displayed at “T10”. The first mode (small button (white)) ”is changed to“ fourth mode (stick) ”(changed in three steps) (successful production).

  32 to 38 are diagrams illustrating display operation examples in the display area of the image display device 5. 32 to 38, character C1 is a friendly character appearing in Super Reach α and Super Reach β, character C2 is an enemy character appearing in Super Reach α, and character C3 is an enemy character appearing in Super Reach β. It is.

  32 and 33 show a display operation example of the specific example 3 (T2 and later) shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 32 (A) → FIG. 32 (B) → FIG. 32 (C) → FIG. 32 (D) → FIG. 32 (E) → FIG. 32 (F) → FIG. 33 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 33 (I) → FIG. 33 (J) → FIG. 33 (K) → FIG. 33 (L) → FIG. 33 (M). FIG. 32 (A) shows a scene (T2) that has been reached. FIG. 32B shows a scene (T3) in which the super reach α is reached. FIG. 32C shows a scene (T4) where display of the small button (white) D1 is started. Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 32C, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

  FIG. 32D is a scene (T5) in which execution of an effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 1 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In the third specific example, the button or the like effect corresponding to the change or the like at the timing 1 is not executed. Therefore, in FIG. 32D, the display is the same as in FIG. ing. FIG. 32E shows a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In specific example 3, since there is no change at timing 1, in FIG. 32E, the display is the same as in FIG. 32D (except for the actions of character C1 and character C2).

  FIG. 32 (F) shows a scene (T7) where execution of an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 2 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In the third specific example, the button or the like effect corresponding to the change or the like at the timing 2 is not executed. Therefore, in FIG. 32 (F), the same display as in FIG. ing. FIG. 33G shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In specific example 3, since the change is weak at timing 2, in FIG. 33G, the small button (white) D1 is changed to the large button (white) D2 (one step change). Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 33 (G), the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the large button (white) D2.

  FIG. 33 (H) is a scene (T9) in which execution of an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In Specific Example 3, since a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 and the like, in FIG. An image JS1 prayed is shown. FIG. 33 (I) shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the specific example 3, since the change is weak at the timing 3, in FIG. 33I, the large button (white) D2 is changed to the large button (red) D3 (one step change). Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 33 (I), the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the large button (red) D3. In FIG. 33I, an image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

  FIG. 33J shows a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (red) D3 (operation of the push button 31B) is enabled. Since the effective period (T11 to T13) is reached, the restriction line K is not displayed in FIG. FIG. 33 (K) shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 33 (J). In order to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, the large button (red) D3 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 33 (J) is displayed as the large button (red) D3U in FIG. 33 (K). Large display in the center of the area. In FIG. 33 (K), information (gauge, numerical value) for notifying the amount of the remaining effective period may be displayed. The same applies to FIGS. 35 (K), 36 (E), 37 (E), and 38 (E). In FIG. 30B, for convenience of illustration, the position of T12 is shown separated from the position of T11. The same applies to other figures such as FIG.

  FIG. 33 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 31B during the effective period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the effective period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the effective period when the button 31B is not operated ends. In specific example 3, since it is a big hit, character C1 who is an ally character wins. That is, as a result of the operation corresponding to the large button (red) D3 (large button (red) D3U) (operation of the push button 31B), the winning / losing (the victory of the character C1) is notified. In FIG. 33 (L), T13 is described as the case where the player does not operate the push button 31B. The same applies to other figures. FIG. 33M shows a scene (T14) where the variable display ends. Note that a fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG.

  34 and 35 show a display operation example of the specific example 4 (T2 and later) shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 34 (A) → FIG. 34 (B) → FIG. 34 (C) → FIG. 34 (D) → FIG. 34 (E) → FIG. 34 (F) → FIG. 35 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 35 (I) → FIG. 35 (J) → FIG. 35 (K) → FIG. 35 (L) → FIG. 35 (M). FIG. 34 (A) shows a scene (T2) that has been reached. FIG. 34B shows a scene (T3) in which the super reach β is reached. FIG. 34C shows a scene (T4) where display of the small button (white) D1 is started. Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 34C, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

  FIG. 34D is a scene (T5) in which execution of an effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 1 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In Specific Example 4, since a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like at timing 1, an image JS1 that character JS prays as a weak action effect is displayed in FIG. ing. FIG. 34E shows a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In specific example 4, since the change is weak at timing 1, in FIG. 34E, the small button (white) D1 is changed to the large button (white) D2 (one step change). Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 34E, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the large button (white) D2. Further, in FIG. 34E, an image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

  FIG. 34 (F) is a scene (T7) in which execution of an effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 2 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In the specific example 4, since the effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 34 (F) is the same as that in FIG. ing. FIG. 35G shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In specific example 4, since there is no change at timing 2, in FIG. 35 (G), the display is the same as in FIG. 34 (F) (excluding the actions of character C1 and character C3).

  FIG. 35 (H) shows a scene (T9) in which execution of an effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In the fourth specific example, a middle effect effect (cannon) is executed as an effect effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like at timing 3, and therefore, a cannon image TS1 is displayed as the intermediate effect effect in FIG. FIG. 35I shows a scene (T10) in which a change at timing 3 is performed. In the specific example 4, since the timing changes to medium at timing 3, in FIG. 35I, the large button (white) D2 is changed to the stick D4 (changed in two steps). Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 35I, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the stick D4. Further, in FIG. 35I, a firing smoke image TS2 and a hit impact image TS3 are also displayed. In addition, when there is no change in the middle effect effect (that is, when it is a failure effect), for example, it may not fire or may not hit even if fired.

  FIG. 35J shows a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the stick D4 (operation of the stick controller 31A) is enabled. Since the effective period (T11 to T13) is reached, the restriction line K is not displayed in FIG. FIG. 35 (K) shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 35 (J). In order to prompt the player to operate the stick controller 31A, the stick D4 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 35 (J) is displayed in the center of the display area as a stick D4U in FIG. 35 (K). ing.

  FIG. 35 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player sticks during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the effective period is over when the controller 31A is not operated. In specific example 4, since it is a big hit, character C1 who is a friendly character wins. That is, as a result of the operation corresponding to the stick D4 (stick D4U) (operation of the stick controller 31A), the winning / losing (the victory of the character C1) is notified. FIG. 35 (M) shows a scene (T14) where the variable display ends. Note that a fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG.

  FIG. 36 illustrates a display operation example of the specific example 1 (T8 and later) illustrated in FIG. Specifically, the transition is made as shown in FIG. 36 (A) → FIG. 36 (B) → FIG. 36 (C) → FIG. 36 (D) → FIG. 36 (E) → FIG. 36 (F) → FIG. To do. FIG. 36A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change at the timing 2 in the specific example 1, the small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 36A, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the small button (white) D1. In specific example 1, a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 2 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change). Since there is no image (that is, a failure effect), in FIG. 36A, the image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed.

  FIG. 36 (B) shows a scene (T9) where the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like at timing 3 is started. In the first specific example, the button or the like effect corresponding to the change or the like at the timing 3 is not executed, so in FIG. 36B, the display is the same as that in FIG. 36A (except for the actions of the characters C1 and C2). ing. FIG. 36C shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In specific example 1, since there is no change at timing 3, in FIG. 36C, the display is the same as in FIG. 36B (except for the actions of character C1 and character C2).

  FIG. 36D is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the small button (white) D1 (operation of the push button 31B) is enabled. Since the effective period (T11 to T13) is reached, the restriction line K is not displayed in FIG. FIG. 36E shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. In order to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, the small button (white) D1 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 36 (D) is displayed as the small button (white) D1U in FIG. 36 (E). Large display in the center of the area.

  FIG. 36F shows a scene when the player operates the push button 31B during the effective period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the effective period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the effective period when the button 31B is not operated ends. In the first specific example, the character C2, which is an enemy character, is victorious because it is lost. That is, as a result of the operation corresponding to the small button (white) D1 (small button (white) D1U) (operation of the push button 31B), the winning / losing (the victory of the character C2) is notified. FIG. 36G shows a scene (T14) where the variable display ends. Note that the next variable display is executed immediately after FIG.

  FIG. 37 illustrates a display operation example of the specific example 2 (T8 and later) illustrated in FIG. Specifically, the transition is as shown in FIG. 37 (A) → FIG. 37 (B) → FIG. 37 (C) → FIG. 37 (D) → FIG. 37 (E) → FIG. 37 (F) → FIG. To do. FIG. 37A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In specific example 2, since there is no change at timing 2, the large button (white) D2 is displayed in FIG. Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 37A, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the large button (white) D2.

  FIG. 37 (B) shows a scene (T9) where the execution of the button action effect corresponding to the change or the like at timing 3 is started. In specific example 2, since a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like at timing 3, an image JS1 that character JS prays as a weak action effect is displayed in FIG. ing. FIG. 37C shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In specific example 2, since there is no change at timing 3, in FIG. 37C, the display is the same as in FIG. 37B (except for the actions of character C1 and character C2). Note that because of the failure effect, the image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed in FIG.

  FIG. 37D shows a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (white) D2 (operation of the push button 31B) is enabled. Since the effective period (T11 to T13) is reached, the restriction line K is not displayed in FIG. FIG. 37E shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. In order to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, the large button (white) D2 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 37 (D) is displayed as the large button (white) D2U in FIG. 37 (E). Large display in the center of the area.

  FIG. 37 (F) shows the scene when the player operates the push button 31B during the effective period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the effective period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the effective period when the button 31B is not operated ends. In the second specific example, the character C2, which is an enemy character, wins because the game is lost. That is, as a result of the operation corresponding to the large button (white) D2 (large button (white) D2U) (operation of the push button 31B), the winning / losing (the victory of the character C2) is notified. FIG. 37G shows a scene (T14) where the variable display ends. Note that the next variable display is executed immediately after FIG.

  FIG. 38 illustrates a display operation example of the specific example 5 (T8 and later) illustrated in FIG. Specifically, transition is made as shown in FIG. 38 (A) → FIG. 38 (B) → FIG. 38 (C) → FIG. 38 (D) → FIG. 38 (E) → FIG. 38 (F) → FIG. To do. FIG. 38A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In specific example 2, since there is no change at timing 2, a small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 38A, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

  FIG. 38B is a scene (T9) in which execution of an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like at timing 3 is started. In Specific Example 5, a strong action effect (lightning strike) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 and the like, and in FIG. 38B, a thundercloud image KS1 is displayed as the strong action effect. FIG. 38C shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the specific example 5, since the change is strong at the timing 3, in FIG. 38C, the small button (white) D1 is changed to the stick D4 (change in three steps). Since it is the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 38C, the restriction line K is displayed so as to be superimposed on the stick D4. In FIG. 38C, a lightning image KS2 and a hit impact image KS3 are also displayed. According to FIG. 27C, the strong action effect always changes, but if there is no change in the strong action effect (that is, the failure effect), for example, there is no lightning strike or there is a lightning strike. You may make it not hit.

  FIGS. 38D to 38G are the same as FIGS. 35J to 35M, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Note that as the operation during the effective period (T11 to T13), a continuous hitting operation (described later) or a long press operation (described later) may be requested from the player. Further, during the effective period (T11 to T13), an auto button or an automatic continuous hitting function described below may be enabled.

(About auto buttons and auto-strike)
Next, the auto button will be described. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button (described later) before executing the winning effect determining process (S150) of the effect control process (S76). The auto button setting process may be executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes the auto button setting process in the effect control process process (S76), subsequently executes the winning effect determining process (S150), and subsequently the effect control flag setting unit 191 and the like. In accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in, one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 can be selected and executed. The auto button setting process only needs to be executed regardless of the value of the effect process flag. For example, the auto button setting is executed after the winning effect determining process (S150) is executed in the effect control process process (S76). The process may be executed, or the auto button setting process may be executed before executing the effect control process (S76) in the effect control main process (FIG. 20).

  In the following description, a button notice effect is executed during variable display of a decorative symbol, and a notice display is performed based on the detection of a single operation or a continuous operation of a button or the like (push button 31B, stick controller 31A) in the button notice effect. Is displayed. “Single operation” means that a button or the like is operated once, and “continuous operation” means that a button or the like is operated continuously a plurality of times.

  The button notice effect is the button development effect described above, and the result of super reach (win / loss etc.) is displayed based on the detection of a single button operation or repeated hitting operation such as a button in the button development effect (during the effective period). May be.

  In addition, the “auto button” is a function in which a button or the like (push button 31B or stick controller 31A) is not actually operated by the player, but the processing is executed assuming that the button or the like is operated. It is. That is, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, even if the button or the like is not operated, the process is executed as if the button or the like is operated once or repeatedly, and a notice display is displayed.

  In addition, “automatic continuous hitting” means that a button is actually operated continuously by a player (for example, long push of the push button 31B, long push of the stick controller 31A, etc. The button is operated continuously several times (for example, continuous pressing of the push button 31B, operation of pulling the stick controller 31A, etc.). It is a function to detect as. In other words, if the auto-hit function is enabled, even if the button is not operated multiple times in succession, the process is executed as if the button is operated repeatedly, and a notice display is displayed. To do.

  Further, the button notice effect may be one type, but may be a plurality of types. Hereinafter, it is assumed that a button notice effect A, a button notice effect B, and a button notice effect C) are prepared as a plurality of types of button notice effects. For example, when the effective period starts, the button notice effect A and the button notice effect B are displayed according to the number of operations of the push button 31B, and whenever the operation of the push button 31B is detected, the gauge display The display is updated so that the scale is reduced by one, and when the number of detected operations reaches a predetermined number of times (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied. A notice display (for example, a character string such as “Fever!” Or “Chance!”) Is displayed. In addition, for example, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected once during the effective period, the button notice effect C determines that the operation condition is satisfied and displays a notice display (for example, character A or character B). It is like.

  In the following description, apart from the button notice effect, a back button notice effect that causes the light emitting member 9CC and the like to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided based on the detected operation of the button or the like during the effective period. To do. In the button notice effect, when the effective period starts, a notification indicating that the operation is effective or prompting the operation is performed. Even if a special effective period is sometimes started to distinguish from a period, notification indicating that the operation is effective or prompting the operation is not performed. Therefore, in the back button notice effect, there is a way of enjoying searching for and executing a special effective period. Due to the characteristics of the back button notice effect, in this embodiment, even if the auto button function is enabled, if the button operation is not detected during the special validity period, the back button notice is given. Control that causes the light emitting member 9CC and the like to emit light in a predetermined manner is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, by executing the auto button setting process, at an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during which a demo screen is displayed, a period during which a decorative symbol is variably displayed, a period during which a jackpot game is being played) Based on the operation of the button or the like, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the auto button function. In the present embodiment, in addition to the setting of the auto button by the auto button setting process, the auto button can be set from the setting menu (a menu screen on which the background image, volume, brightness, etc. can be set). And In the present embodiment, the automatic continuous hitting function is always enabled. However, as with the auto button function, it may be configured to enable or disable the setting.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the auto button setting process. In FIG. 39 (the same applies to FIGS. 40 and 41), the operation of the push button 31B will be described as an operation of a button or the like, but the same applies to the stick controller 31A.

  In the auto button setting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not an auto button valid flag indicating that the auto button function is valid is set (step S7101).

  If it is determined that the auto button valid flag is not set (step S7101; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets an operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the button notice effect is valid. It is confirmed whether or not (step S7102). If the operation valid period flag is set (step S7102; YES), the auto button setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the operation valid period flag is not set (step S7102; NO), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a long press operation of the push button 31B has been detected (step S7103). . If the long press operation of the push button 31B is not detected (step S7103; NO), the auto button setting process is terminated. Whether or not a long press operation of the push button 31B has been detected is determined by, for example, setting an operation detection flag when a push operation of the push button 31B is detected in a timer interruption, and detecting an operation when no press operation is detected. It is configured to reset the flag, and when the operation detection flag is set and the state where the push operation of the push button 31B is detected continues for a predetermined period, it is determined that the long press operation is detected. You may do it.

  When the long push operation of the push button is detected (step S7103; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the auto button valid flag (step S7104).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display on the image display device 5 an auto button valid display indicating that the function of the auto button is valid (step S7105). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output an auto button effective sound effect indicating that the auto button function is valid (step S7106). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has an auto button function that is different from a normal light emission mode (for example, white light emission) of the push button LED (the LED provided on the push button 31B) being enabled. Is controlled to emit light in a special light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) (step S7107).

  If it is determined that the auto button valid flag is set (step S7101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the back button notice effect is valid. It is confirmed whether it is set (step S7108). If the special operation valid period flag is set (step S7108; YES), the auto button setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the special operation valid period flag is not set (step S7108; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting menu display flag indicating that the setting menu is being displayed. It is confirmed whether or not (step S7109), and if set (step S7109); YSE), the auto button setting process is terminated.

  When the setting menu display flag is not set (step S7109; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a push operation (single operation) of the push button 31B is detected (step S7110). If the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 31B is not detected, the auto button setting process is terminated.

  When the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 31B is detected (step S7110; YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the auto button valid flag (step S7111).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display on the image display device 5 an auto button invalid display indicating that the function of the auto button is invalid (step S7112). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output an auto button invalid sound effect (sound effect different from the above auto button valid sound effect) indicating that the auto button function is invalid (step S7113). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to cause the push button LED to emit light in the normal light emission mode (step S7114).

  The auto button setting process has been described with reference to FIG. 39. However, by executing the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39, the function of the auto button can be set to be valid or invalid at an arbitrary timing. Specifically, the player can set the auto button function to be valid by performing a long press operation on the push button 31B when the auto button function is invalid (see steps S7101, S7103, and S7104). ) If the push button 31B is pressed (single operation) while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function can be set to be invalid (see steps S7101, S7110, and S7111). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function not only during the period during which the demonstration screen is displayed but also during the period when the decorative symbols are variably displayed or during the big hit game. it can. That is, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function without interrupting the game once, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered due to the interruption.

  However, in the present embodiment, there is an exceptionally period during which no auto button function setting change is accepted. For example, when the auto button function is disabled, a long press operation may be performed to display a notice display during the effective period of the button notice effect. If this setting is changed, a setting change unintended by the player is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the effective period of the operation in the button notice effect (that is, when the operation effective period flag is set), even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected, the auto button It is configured not to change the function from invalid to valid (see step S7102). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in the function setting of the auto button.

  It is to be noted that during the effective period of the operation in the back button notice effect, or a decision button effect (whether it is a big hit as a success / failure notification based on detecting the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 31B during the effective period) During the effective period of the display), predetermined control is performed based on the detection of the pressing operation (single operation), so the player does not need to perform the long pressing operation. However, since it is assumed that the intention to perform the single operation is a long press operation as a result, the operation is effective for the back button notice effect (that is, when the special operation effective period flag is set). Even during the effective period of the operation for the decision button effect (when the flag for the effective operation period of the decision button effect indicating that the operation is valid for the decision button effect is set), the push button 31B is held down. Even if an operation is detected, the auto button function may not be changed from disabled to enabled. Similarly, a single operation of the push button 31B may be performed in order to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the displayed setting menu, but the intention to perform the single operation is a long press operation as a result. Therefore, even when the setting menu is being displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), even if a long press operation of the push button 31B is detected, the function of the auto button is maintained. You may comprise so that it may not change from invalid to valid.

  In the present embodiment, the push button 31B must be pressed in order to execute the back button notice effect even when the auto button function is enabled. ing. Therefore, an operation for executing the back button notice effect may be performed during the effective period of the operation in the back button notice effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the effective period of the operation in the back button notice effect (that is, when the special operation effective period flag is set), even if the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, the auto button The function is not changed from valid to invalid (see step S7108). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in the function setting of the auto button.

  In the present embodiment, the push button 31B may be pressed to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the setting menu. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting menu is displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the auto button function is enabled to disabled even if the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected. (See step S7109). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in the function setting of the auto button.

  In the present embodiment, the button notice effect is started when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, and when the player operates the push button 31B according to the button notice effect, the auto button Is changed from enabled to disabled (for example, realized by the processing of steps S7101, S7108 to S7111), but in addition to the function of the auto button being changed from enabled to disabled, the detection result of the operation May be configured to be reflected in the button notice effect. With such a configuration, even if the auto button function is set to be valid, if the player wants to perform an operation, the operation can be immediately reflected in the effect.

  Note that when the player operates the push button 31B in response to the button notice effect that is started when the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is changed from enabled to disabled. Instead of the configuration, for example, it may be configured so that the function of the auto button is not changed during execution of the button notice effect, and the function of the auto button is changed from valid to invalid after the button notice effect is finished. Good. A configuration in which the function of the auto button is changed from valid to invalid after the button notice effect is finished can be realized by executing the following processing, for example. If the CPU 120 for effect control detects the operation of the push button 31B in step S7110, the process of steps S7111 to S7114 is executed if the button notice effect is not valid, and the function of the auto button is valid if it is valid. The process for setting the auto button change hold flag indicating that the change to invalid is suspended is executed, and the auto button setting process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S7111 to S7114. Then, at the end of the button notice effect (for example, when the notice display is displayed or when the valid period ends), the effect control CPU 120 activates the function of the auto button if the auto button change hold flag is set. Change from valid to invalid (that is, reset the auto button valid flag and reset the auto button change hold flag). Note that the push button 31B is repeatedly operated for a configuration in which the function of the auto button is changed from valid to invalid after the button notice effect is finished (configuration in which the setting change of the auto button function is temporarily suspended). A button notice effect A and a button notice effect B in which a notice display is displayed based on detection, and a button notice effect C in which a notice display is displayed based on detection of a single operation of the push button 31B. It may be applied to only one of them or to both.

  Further, when the player operates the push button 31B according to the button notice effect, when the function of the auto button is changed from valid to invalid after the button notice effect ends, for example, In addition to detecting the operation of the push button 31B at predetermined intervals by the function, it may be detected that the push button 31B is actually operated by the player and reflected in the effect. That is, you may make it reflect in a production | presentation the operation performed continuously by the auto button, and the operation actually performed. In such a configuration, for example, when the auto button change hold flag is set, the value of the operation number counter (the effect corresponding to the value is performed) is updated at predetermined intervals by the function of the auto button. In addition, it is realized by updating the value of the operation number counter according to the operation of the push button 31B.

  Further, for example, when the push button 31B is configured to be deformable and the push button 31B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state with a predetermined effect (that is, during the execution of the effect accompanied by the deformation of the push button 31B) In this case, the setting of the auto button may not be changed even if the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected. For example, when the operation is strongly urged by deforming the push button 31B, there is a case where there is no intention to change the setting even if the operation is performed. In addition, when the push button 31B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state, for example, when the button part is deformed to protrude to the player side than the normal state, or in the normal state, it is combined. In addition to the case where the button part is split, or the case where a plurality of parts for the button part are combined to form a single button part, it can be rotated (for example, around the vertical axis of rotation) This includes the case where the button portion that is rotatable or rotatable around the rotation axis in the horizontal direction is rotating.

  Next, a display mode when the auto button function is set to be valid or invalid will be described. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a display mode when the auto button function is set to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 40, the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In FIG. 40 (1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (1), when the player presses the push button 31B for a long time while the decorative symbol variable display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 40 (2), the auto button Is enabled, and a character string such as “auto button enabled” is displayed on the image display device 5 to display that the auto button function is enabled. At this time, control for outputting the auto button effective sound effect from the speaker 8 and control for causing the push button 31B to emit light in a special light emission mode are performed (see steps S7103 to S7107).

  Also, when the player performs a pressing operation (single operation) on the push button 31B when the auto button function is set to be valid, the auto button function is disabled as shown in FIG. 40 (3). In addition, a character string such as “auto button invalid” is displayed on the image display device 5, and a display indicating that the function of the auto button is set to invalid is performed. At this time, control for outputting the auto button invalid effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for causing the push button 31B to emit light in the normal light emission mode are performed (see steps S711 to S7114).

  In the example of FIG. 40, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the decorative display of the decorative design. The setting of the auto button function can be changed during the demonstration screen display period, the big hit game period, and the like.

  Next, the difference between the case where the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed and the case where the automatic continuous hit by the auto button function is performed will be described. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation and automatic continuous hitting by an auto button function. In the automatic continuous hitting by the long press operation during the effective period, the continuous hit determination is turned on after a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed after the long pressing operation of the push button 31B is started. It may be different depending on the type. In the description of FIG. 41, it is assumed that the start waiting period of the button notice effect A is 4 seconds and the start wait period of the button notice effect A is 2 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 41, it is assumed that execution of the button notice effect A is determined.

  In the case of button notice effect A, when automatic continuous hitting is performed by a long press operation after the start of the effective period, as shown in FIG. 41A, start standby after the long press operation of push button 31B is started. After the period (4 seconds) has elapsed, the repeated hit determination is turned on (that is, the process is executed as if the continuous hit operation has been performed after 4 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced. Go).

  On the other hand, for the button notice effect A, when automatic continuous hitting is performed by the auto button function, as shown in FIG. 41B, the continuous hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the effective period (that is, As soon as the effective period starts, the process is executed as if the continuous hitting operation has been performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the production (for example, reduction in the scale of the gauge display) ) Can be performed at different timings, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, for the button notice effect B, when automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed after the start of the effective period, the illustration is omitted, but the start standby period (2) after the long press operation of the push button 31B is started. Seconds), the continuous hit detection is turned on (that is, the process is executed as if the continuous hit operation has been performed after 2 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced), and the button notice For the effect B, when the automatic repeated hitting is performed by the auto button function, the repeated hitting determination is turned on immediately after the effective period starts. In other words, in either case of button announcement effects A and B, the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. The timing at which (for example, a reduction in the scale of the gauge display) is executed is different.

  Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart, image display operation in the image display device 5 and the like are arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the display start timing of the image such as a button ("location" in FIG. 25) was after Super Reach development (see FIG. 29A), but the display start timing of the image such as a button is It may be before the development of super reach or at the time of super reach development. In the above embodiment, the change timing of the image such as a button (“timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 25) was after the development of super reach (see FIG. 29A). The change timing of an image such as a button may be before the development of super reach or at the time of development of super reach.

  In addition, the variation pattern of super reach with pseudo continuous variation ("PA4-2", "PA4-3", "PA5-2", "PA5-3", "PB4-2", "PB4-3", " In all or some of the variation patterns of “PB5-2” and “PB5-3”), temporary stop display or revariable display may be performed after super reach.

  Further, a button development effect may be executed (display of an image such as a button) over a plurality of variable displays (or re-variable displays) in pseudo-continuous variation. As an example, if the fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” proceeds as follows: variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and re-variable display → super reach β → final stop display In the pattern “PB4-2”, the display and change timing of images such as buttons (“location”, “timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 25) are, for example, “initial” before reach, The time between reach and the first temporary stop display may be “timing 1”, the time after the first temporary stop display to the re-variable display may be “timing 2”, and the time after the re-variable display may be “timing 3”. Accordingly, when the button development effect pattern “BH3a-1” is determined in the variation pattern “PB4-2”, variable display start → small button (white) is displayed (“initial”) → reach → large button (white) ) Change (timing 1) → first temporary stop display → no change (timing 2) → revariable display → change to large button (red) (timing 3) → final stop display. As another example, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and revariable display → super reach β → second temporary stop display and revariable display → final stop In the case where the display progresses like the display, the display and change timing of the image such as the button in the variation pattern “PB5-3” is, for example, “initial” between reach and the first temporary stop display. The time between the temporary stop display and the re-variable display is “timing 1”, the time after the development of the super reach β to the second temporary stop display is “timing 2”, and the time after the second re-variable display is “timing” 3 ”. Therefore, when the button development effect pattern “BH3a-1” is determined in the variation pattern “PB5-3”, variable display start → reach → display small button (white) (“initial”) → first temporary Stop display → Change to large button (white) (timing 1) → Re-variable display → Super reach β → No change (timing 2) → Second temporary stop display → Re-variable display → Change to large button (red) (Timing 3) → Proceed as a final stop display.

  In the above embodiment, when variable display start of a certain variable display is performed, whether or not the button development effect is performed is determined based on the variable display variation pattern (FIGS. 24, 26, and 27 ( A)), it may be determined whether or not the button development effect is executed at another timing. For example, the presence or absence of execution of the button development effect may be determined based on the variation category or the like when there is a start prize. In addition, at other timings (for example, at the time of starting winning a prize, etc.), in addition to whether or not the button development effect is executed, the button development effect effect mode (button development effect pattern or the like) and the button effect effect effect mode are determined. Good.

  When determining the presence / absence of execution of the button development effect, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.) or the effect mode of the effect effect such as a button when there is a start prize, the button is displayed before the variable display related to the start prize. The button development effect may be started during the variable display related to the start prize without starting the development effect, or the button development effect may be started before the variable display related to the start prize.

  In addition, when the button development effect is started before the variable display related to the start prize (when the button development effect is executed by so-called pre-reading), the button development effect is immediately started (images such as buttons are displayed) at the time of the start prize. Alternatively, the button development effect may be started at the start of the variable display corresponding to the winning before the start winning (when the hold display is shifted), or during the variable display corresponding to the winning before the starting winning ( The button development effect may be started before the reach or after the reach). It should be noted that the period from the start of the button development effect during the pre-reading period (at the start of displaying the display of buttons, etc.) to the predetermined timing of variable display related to the start winning (for example, T13 in FIG. 29) is the display period of the buttons, etc. is there.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an action effect such as a button (weak effect effect, intermediate effect effect, strong effect effect) is suddenly executed without any precaution (for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (H), an image JS1 is displayed). For example, the image TS1 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (H), and the image KS1 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 38 (B). A notice effect for notifying that the game state is to be controlled (for example, a feature fall effect for dropping the movable accessory 17 to a position in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, a cut-in effect for cutting in an image, The action effect such as a button may be executed by executing a countdown effect for displaying a number to be counted down. Specifically, there is at least a case where an effect such as a button is executed by executing a notice effect, and a case where an effect such as a button is executed without executing the notice effect (notice effect). Is executed, but it may or may not be applied to the case where the action effect such as a button is not executed). It should be noted that the ratio of whether the image such as the button changes between the case where the effect such as the button is executed by executing the notice effect and the case where the effect such as the button is executed without executing the notice effect. Alternatively, the ratio of which button or other image is changed may be changed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the big hit expectation differs depending on the type of display such as buttons (“small button (white)”, “large button (white)”, “large button (red)”, “stick”)). (See FIG. 27 (B)), the expected degree of 16R probability variation big hit may be different depending on the type of display such as buttons. Specifically, for example, the determination ratio of the button development effect category may be varied depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 7). Further, when a normal big hit is provided in addition to the probable big hit as the big hit type, the degree of expectation for the probable big hit may differ depending on the type of display such as a button.

(A1) As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and can be a detection means (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A) capable of detecting a player's action. Etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, the small button (white) D1, the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38), Specific display execution means for performing a small button (white) D1U, a large button (white) D2U, a large button (red) D3U, a stick D4U, etc. (for example, button development effect processing (S529), variable display effect processing (S172)) The specific display executing means has a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D1) as the specific display, and is more useful to the player than the first specific display. The second specific display (for example, the first specific display) having a high degree (for example, the expected degree of jackpot expectation, the expected degree of 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 7), the normal degree big hit and the expected degree of probability variation big hit when there is a probable variation big hit) Is the small button (white) D1, the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, etc. The first specific display is the large button (white) D2. The second specific display can display a large button (red) D3, stick D4, etc., and when the first specific display is a large button (red) D3, the second specific display can display a stick D4, etc. After the one specific display is displayed, the second specific display is performed by executing the action effect (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect shown in FIG. 27C) that acts on the specific display. Can be displayed (for example, FIG. 34 ( ) After the small button (white) D1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 34D, the weak action of displaying the image JS1 and the image JS2 acting on the small button (white) D1 as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E). When the effect is executed, the large button (white) D2 can be displayed as shown in FIG. 34E, or after the large button (white) D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (I) by executing the medium effect effect that displays the image TS1, the image TS2, and the image TS3 acting on the large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 35 (I). The stick D4 can be displayed).

  According to the above configuration, the production effect is improved. For example, the specific display changes depending on the action effect, so that the effect is easy to understand and the effect is improved.

(A2) The gaming machine of the above (A1) displays the above-mentioned action after displaying the first specific display in the ineffective period of detection by the detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, etc.) When the effect is executed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after the large button (white) D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 34E), As shown in FIG. 35 (I), a large button (white) D2 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 35 (I), the large button (white) D2 is displayed. (White) D2 is changed to a stick D4), and the second specific display (for example, FIG. 35 (J)) in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). Or as shown in Figure 35 (K) Operation effect using a stick D4 and a stick D4U etc.) (e.g., FIG. 35 (K) directed to notify the results as shown in FIG. 35 (L) prompts the operation as shown in, etc.) is executed.

  According to the said structure, the feeling of expectation before an effective period can be raised.

(A3) In the gaming machine of (A1) or (A2), there are a plurality of types of action effects (for example, a weak action effect, a medium effect effect, a strong effect effect, etc. shown in FIG. 27C). The rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which action effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 27C, there is no change and there is a change (weak change, medium change). In the case of change or strong change), the determination ratio of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect is different, so that the second specific display is changed depending on which button or the like effect effect is executed. The ratio is different).

  According to the said structure, the expectation with respect to an effect effect can be raised.

(A4) In any of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A3), the action effects may be of a plurality of types (for example, weak action effects, medium action effects, strong action effects, etc. shown in FIG. 27C). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, the large button (white) shown in FIGS. ) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc.), and the ratio of which specific display changes depends on which action effect is executed (for example, FIG. 27C ) As shown in the figure, in the case of a weak change (1 step change), a medium change (2 step change), and a strong change (3 step change), a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action effect. Since the decision ratio of each button is different, any button etc. For example, when the small change (white) D1 is before the change, the small button ( White) D1 changes to large button (white) D2, small button (white) D1 changes to large button (red) D3 when medium change is executed, and small button (white) when strong change is executed D1 changes to the stick D4, so the ratio of which specific display changes depends on which action effect such as button is executed).

  According to the said structure, the expectation with respect to an effect effect can be raised.

(A5) In any one of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after the change. The motion effect detected by the detecting means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the motion effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the changed large button (white) D2 is executed, as shown in FIG. 33). As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 38, the action controller detects the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D3 after the change, and the stick controller 31A corresponding to the stick D4 after the change. The motion effect detected is executed).

  According to the above configuration, it can be noted which specific display corresponds to which operation means.

(A6) In any one of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A5), the specific display execution unit is configured such that the ineffective period of detection by the detection unit (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, etc. ), The specific display is displayed in a manner indicating the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, a small button ( (White) D1, a large button (white) D2 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon, a large button (red) D3 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon, and a stick D4 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is ineffective.

(A7) In any one of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous variations). The display can be changed by displaying a specific display over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching).

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(A8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player , Countdown effect, accessory fall effect, etc.) can be executed, and the effect effect is executed by executing the notice effect.

  According to the above configuration, a sense of expectation for a specific notice effect can be enhanced.

  (A9) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A8) described above, the setting state related to the performance is set to a first state (for example, a state where the auto button function is disabled) or a second state (for example, Setting means (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39, etc.) that can be set to an auto button function enabled state, and a specific effect (for example, a button notice) In the productions A to C and the decision button production, it is possible to execute a display for reducing the scale of the gauge display, a notice display or a display of the success / failure display based on the detected operation of the push button 31B. Specific production execution means (for example, the variable display production process shown in FIG. 22 and the like), and the specific production execution means also detects the detection result of the detection means in the first state. Accordingly, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied, while the specific effect can be executed if the effect execution condition is satisfied in the second state regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 31B is not operated, the display of the notice display, the display of the success / failure display, the display of reducing the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means during execution of variable display (for example, the part for executing the processing of steps S7103 to S7104 in FIG. 39) Etc.).

  According to the said structure, it can prevent that an interest falls.

(B1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game and can detect a player's action (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A, etc.) Specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, the small button (white) D1, the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, the small button shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38). (White) D1U, large button (white) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc.) specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S529), variable display effect processing (S172), etc.) The specific display execution means includes, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D1), and a player's advantage over the first specific display ( For example, the second specific display (for example, the first specific display is small, the expected degree of big hit expectation, the expected degree of 16R probability variable big hit (see FIG. 7), the normal big hit and the expected degree of probability varying big hit when there is a probable big hit) When the button (white) D1 is used, the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D2, the second specific display is the first button. 2 specific display can display large button (red) D3, stick D4, etc., and when the first specific display is large button (red) D3, the second specific display can display stick D4, etc. In a non-valid period of detection (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, etc.), after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. As shown in 32 (C) After the small button (white) D1 is displayed, the small button (white) D1 is changed to the large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 33G, and the large button (white) D2 is further changed to FIG. ) And the second specific display after the change in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). (For example, as shown in FIG. 33K, for example, using a large button (red) D3, large button (red) D3U, etc. as shown in FIGS. 33J and 33K). As shown in FIG. 33 (L), the user is prompted to perform the operation and the result is notified.

  According to the above configuration, the production effect is improved. For example, since the specific display is changed during the non-effective period, the change can be shown, and the production effect is improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of (B1), the first specific display is an effect that acts on the specific display (for example, a weak effect, a medium effect, and a strong effect shown in FIG. 27C). Is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 34C is changed to the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 34D or FIG. 34E). White) When the weak action effect that displays the image JS1 and the image JS2 acting on D1 is executed, the button changes to the large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 34E, and the large effect shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35H and 35I, the button (white) D2 has a medium effect effect for displaying the image TS1, the image TS2, and the image TS3 acting on the large button (white) D2. To change to the stick D4 as shown in FIG. The small button (white) D1 shown in A) is a strong action that displays the image TK1, the image TK2, and the image TK3 acting on the small button (white) D1, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (C). When the effect is executed, it changes to the stick D4 as shown in FIG.

  According to the said structure, a production effect improves with an effect production.

(B3) In the gaming machine of (B1) or (B2), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action shown in FIG. 27C). The ratio of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 27C, there is a change and no change). In the case of (weak change, medium change or strong change), the determination ratio of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect is different. The rate of change to specific display is different).

  According to the said structure, the expectation with respect to an effect effect can be raised.

(B4) In any one of the above gaming machines (B1) to (B3), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, the weak action effects shown in FIG. 27C, the medium action effects, There is a strong action effect etc., and the display mode of the specific display after the change is a plurality of types (for example, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4 shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38). , A large button (white) D2U, a large button (red) D3U, a stick D4U, etc.), and the ratio of which the specific display changes depends on which action effect is executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 27 (C), a weak action effect and a medium action in the case of a weak change (1 step change), a middle change (2 step change), and a strong change (3 step change). Because the decision rate of each production and strong effect production is different, The ratio of whether the change effect is a weak change, a medium change, or a strong change varies depending on whether the action effect such as the button is executed, for example, when the small button (white) D1 is before the change, the weak change is executed. Then, the small button (white) D1 changes to the large button (white) D2, and when the middle change is executed, the small button (white) D1 changes to the large button (red) D3, and the strong change is executed. The small button (white) D1 changes to the stick D4, and therefore the ratio of which specific display changes depends on which button or the like effect is executed).

  According to the said structure, the expectation with respect to an effect effect can be raised.

(B5) In any one of the gaming machines (B1) to (B4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A, etc.), and corresponds to the specific display after the change. The motion effect detected by the detecting means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the motion effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the changed large button (white) D2 is executed, as shown in FIG. 33). As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 38, the action controller detects the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D3 after the change, and the stick controller 31A corresponding to the stick D4 after the change. Execute the motion effect detected).

  According to the above configuration, it can be noted which specific display corresponds to which operation means.

(B6) In any one of the above gaming machines (B1) to (B5), the specific display execution unit is configured to detect the ineffective period of detection by the detection unit (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, etc. ), The specific display is displayed in a manner indicating the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, a small button ( (White) D1, a large button (white) D2 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon, a large button (red) D3 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon, and a stick D4 with a restriction line K superimposed thereon).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is ineffective.

(B7) In any one of the above gaming machines (B1) to (B6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-variables). The display can be changed by displaying a specific display over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching).

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(B8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that any of the gaming machines (B1) to (B7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player , A countdown effect, an accessory fall effect, etc.) can be executed, an action effect acting on the specific display is executed when the notice effect is executed, and the second specification is executed when the action effect is executed The display changes.

  According to the above configuration, a sense of expectation for a specific notice effect can be enhanced.

  (B9) The gaming machine of any of the above (B1) to (B8) has the setting state related to the production in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be invalid) or the second state (for example, Setting means (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39, etc.) that can be set to an auto button function enabled state, and a specific effect (for example, a button notice) In the productions A to C and the decision button production, it is possible to execute a display for reducing the scale of the gauge display, a notice display or a display of the success / failure display based on the detected operation of the push button 31B. Specific production execution means (for example, the variable display production process shown in FIG. 22 and the like), and the specific production execution means also detects the detection result of the detection means in the first state. Accordingly, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied, while the specific effect can be executed if the effect execution condition is satisfied in the second state regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 31B is not operated, the display of the notice display, the display of the success / failure display, the display of reducing the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means during execution of variable display (for example, the part for executing the processing of steps S7103 to S7104 in FIG. 39) Etc.).

  According to the said structure, it can prevent that an interest falls.

  In the above (A1) to (A9) and (B1) to (B9), the “detection means” is not limited to the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, but an object ( A sensor that detects an operation using a structure (for example, an operation of pushing the whole or a part of an object backward or downward, an operation of pulling forward or upward, or an operation of rotating or sliding). May be. Further, it may be a sensor that detects the contact of the player's body (hand, etc.) on the glass surface or the like, or a sensor that detects the operation of the player's body (hand, face, etc.) that does not contact the gaming machine. Etc. That is, the “detection unit” may be a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, or the like. When the “detecting means” is a touch sensor that can detect a touch on the glass surface, for example, the “specific display” is an image reminiscent of a touch on the glass surface (for example, an image imitating a palm) ).

  In addition to the above, changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the spirit of the invention. For example, in the above description, when it is determined that the button development effect is to be executed, the button development effect category is determined before the button development effect pattern is determined (see FIG. 26). You may decide. That is, the concept of a button development effect category need not be used.

  The button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 25 is a button development effect pattern in which “initial” is “first mode (small button (white))”, but “initial” is “second mode (large button). (White)) ”or“ third mode (large button (red)) ”or“ fourth mode (stick) ”may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the display start timing of the image such as a button is constant (T4). However, the display start timing of the image such as a button may have a plurality of timings. There may be a plurality of timings for each type of image such as a button.

  Depending on the display start timing, the ratio of whether or not an image such as a button will change (grow) later, and the ratio of how much the image may change may be varied. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which an image such as a button changes later is higher than when the display start timing is early, and the rate at which the image changes to a stick may be higher. Further, in an aspect in which there are a plurality of types of timing from the non-valid period to the valid period (described later), the ratio of the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period may be varied according to the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the timing from the ineffective period to the valid period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than when the display start timing is early. In addition, when there is an aspect in which the non-effective period does not become the effective period (described later), the ratio of whether or not the effective period is reached may be varied depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the ratio of the effective period may be higher than when the display start timing is early. Moreover, in the aspect of executing the removal success effect (described later), the execution rate of the removal success effect may be varied according to the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than when it is early.

  In addition, the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 25 changes an image such as a button at the maximum two change timings among the three change timings (timing 1, timing 2, timing 3). ) May change the image such as a button at the change timing. That is, a button development effect pattern that is weakly changed at timing 1 (first → second), weakly changed at timing 2 (second → third), and weakly changed at timing 3 (third → fourth) is provided. Also good. Further, the change timing may not be three times, and may be once, twice, four times or more.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the button development effect pattern which alert | reports determination of jackpot. As an example, a large-sized rainbow-colored button image (“large button (rainbow)”) simulating the push button 31B and a rainbow-colored stick controller image (“stick (rainbow)”) simulating the stick controller 31A are displayed as “ In addition to providing a button development effect pattern (sometimes referred to as a “big hit fixed button development effect pattern”) in which the “final” is the “fifth aspect”, a variation pattern of super reach (big hit) ( In the case of “PB4-X” and “PB5-X”), the button development effect pattern for determining the big hit may be determined, but in the case of the super-reach (losing) variation pattern (“PA4-X” “PA5-X”) The final button development effect pattern may not be determined.

  The operation means (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) may emit at least a part (or the periphery), and the operation means may be changed according to the image of the button or the like. For example, when no image such as any button is displayed, the light emitting portion of the push button 31B and the light emitting portion of the stick controller 31A are turned off, and when the small button (white) is displayed, the light emitting portion of the push button 31B is white. When the large button (white) is displayed, the light emitting portion of the push button 31B blinks in white (or lights in red), and when the large button (red) is displayed, the push button 31B The light emitting section of the stick controller 31A may be lit in white (or blinked in white) when the stick is displayed. In addition, when blinking the light emitting unit of the operation means, an image such as a button may be blinked.

  In addition, in FIG. 25 and the like, an image such as a button corresponds to one of the two operation means (one operation means is valid). Specifically, the small button (white), the large button (white), and the large button (red) correspond to the push button 31B, and the stick corresponds to the stick controller 31A. Instead, an image such as a button corresponding to both of the two operation means may be displayed. As an example, in any case of a small button (white), a large button (white), a large button (red), and a stick, both the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A may be valid. Since the effect is such that the operation means changes in the middle, by enabling both, it is possible to prevent a result (such as winning or losing) from being displayed even though the operation is performed. Further, as another example, the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A correspond to the logo mark (for example, the logo mark related to the content used for the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the brand name of the pachinko gaming machine 1). May be displayed. That is, when the logo mark is displayed during the effective period, the result is displayed regardless of whether the push button 31B is operated or the stick controller 31A is operated.

  In addition, according to FIG. 27C, when “strong action effect” is executed, it is expected to be mainly “strong change”, but “medium change” or “weak change” below expectation. May also be. If the “strong action effect” is changed to “medium change” or “weak change”, the expected “strong change” corresponds to a so-called fall, and the player may be discouraged. Accordingly, the “strong action effect” may not be determined when “weak change” or “medium change”. Thereby, when the “strong action effect” is executed, the “strong change” is confirmed and the player is not discouraged. Further, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the “medium effect effect”, it is expected that the “medium change” mainly, but there may be a “weak change” less than expected. Accordingly, the “medium effect effect” may not be determined when the “weak change” is set. As a result, when the button image or the like changes after the “medium effect effect” is executed, “medium change” or more is confirmed and the player is not discouraged. Note that the “strong effect” is not determined when “no change”, but the “medium effect” may not be determined in addition to the “strong effect” when “no change”.

  In addition, the change of the image such as a button is classified according to the degree of change (number of stages) (“weak effect effect” for changing one step, “medium effect effect” for changing in two steps, and “strong effect effect” for changing in three steps. Etc.) and control (manage), etc., but it is divided into what changes the image such as buttons, etc. (for example, the second action effect that changes from the first mode to the second mode, the first mode or the second mode) The third action effect may be controlled by changing the mode to the third mode, the first mode, the second mode, or the fourth mode of action changing from the third mode to the fourth mode.

  In the above embodiment, the super reach is a so-called battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other. However, the super reach is not limited to the battle effect. For example, it may be a story-type production in which the story is completed successfully when it is a big hit (when the game is lost, the story is not completed successfully). When the button development effect is executed in the story-type super reach, for example, depending on the operation during the effective period (as the operation effect), the result of the story instead of the result of the battle effect (win / loss etc.) It only needs to be informed (whether or not the story is successfully completed).

  When the ineffective period is changed to the effective period, an effect (hereinafter referred to as a “removal effect”) for removing an image (for example, the restriction line K shown in FIGS. 32 to 38) for notifying that the ineffective period is in effect. Also, it may be referred to as “removal success effect” in distinction from “removal failure effect” described later). For example, between FIGS. 37 (C) and 37 (D), an effect (for example, a character (a policeman or the like) that removes the restriction line K superimposed on the large button (white) D2 collects the restriction line K. An effect of absorbing the restriction line K with a vacuum cleaner, an effect of burning the restriction line K with a flame, an effect such that the large button (white) D2 itself vibrates, etc., etc. .

  In addition, a removal failure effect (an effect in which at least a part of the effect aspect is common with the removal success effect and an image for notifying that the ineffective period is not removed) may be executed. When the removal failure effect is executed, the super reach may be terminated without the effective period. In other words, for example, when the removal success effect is executed in FIG. 37, FIG. 37 (C) → removal success effect → FIG. 37 (D) → FIG. 37 (E) → FIG. 37 (F) → FIG. On the other hand, when the removal failure effect is executed in FIG. 37, the transition may be made from FIG. 37 (C) → removal failure effect → FIG. 37 (F) → FIG. 37 (G). .

  In addition, there are multiple types of timing from the ineffective period to the effective period. When the effective period from the ineffective period is late, the images such as buttons are sufficient because the ineffective period is longer than when it is early. It may be changed (growth). In addition to the case where the removal success effect is executed without being executed once, the case where the removal success effect is executed after the removal failure effect is executed one or more times, The removal success effect may not be executed after being executed once or more. As a result, when the image of the button or the like is not sufficiently grown, the player does not execute the removal success effect because it is premature as the validity period has arrived (for example, the effect of attempting to remove the restriction line K is started). In the event that the control line K is finally removed, that is, it is desired that the removal failure effect is executed instead of the removal success effect), but the effective period when the image such as the button is sufficiently grown The removal success effect is executed as an effect (for example, when the effect to remove the restriction line K is started, the restriction line K is finally removed, that is, the removal failure effect is not performed). That the removal success production is being executed). In other words, it can be noted whether an effect according to the situation is executed.

  Note that the image for notifying that it is during the ineffective period may be another image instead of the restriction line image. For example, an image of a chain and a key hung on an image such as a button, an image of a translucent case that accommodates an image such as a button, or ice that is displayed on an image such as a frozen button It may be.

  Depending on the type of image for notifying that it is in an ineffective period, the ratio of whether or not an image such as a button will change (grow) later, and the ratio of how much the image may change may be varied. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate at which an image such as a button changes later and the rate at which it changes to a stick may be higher than in the case of “regulation line”. Further, in an aspect in which there are a plurality of types of timing from the non-valid period to the valid period, the ratio of the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period varies depending on the type of image for informing that the period is not valid. It may be allowed. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate at which the timing from the ineffective period to the effective period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than in the case of “regulation line”. Further, in the case where there is an aspect that does not become the effective period from the ineffective period, the ratio of whether or not the effective period is reached may be varied depending on the image for informing that the ineffective period is in effect. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the ratio of the effective period may be set higher than in the case of “regulation line”. Moreover, in the aspect which performs a removal success production | presentation, according to the image for alert | reporting that it is in an ineffective period, you may vary the execution ratio of a removal success production | presentation. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than in the case of “regulation line”.

  In addition, an image for notifying that the period is not valid may be changed (growth). For example, when the small button (white) is selected, the “regulation line” is selected. When the large button (white) is selected, the “chain and key” is changed. When the large button (red) is selected, the “translucent case” is selected. The image for notifying that the ineffective period is in effect may be changed at the same timing as the change timing of the image such as a button, such as changing to “ice” when the stick is formed. . Also, for example, when it is a large button (white), it is changed from “regulation line” to “chain and key”, and when it is a stick, it is changed from “chain and key” to “semi-transparent case” and “ice”. The image for informing that the ineffective period is in effect may be changed at a timing different from the change timing of the image such as a button.

  In the aspect in which the image for notifying that the ineffective period is being used is changed, the image for notifying that the ineffective period is being used may be changed depending on the effect. The effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be the same (common) as the effect of changing the image such as a button. In addition, when a common action effect is executed, when the image for informing that the image such as the button is also in the ineffective period also changes, and informing that the image such as the button is also in the ineffective period. For example, there may be a case where the image for both does not change and a case where one of the images changes. Further, the effect of changing the image for notifying that the period is ineffective may be different from the effect of changing the image such as a button. That is, apart from the action effect that changes the image such as a button, a dedicated action effect that changes the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be provided.

  In addition, when the image for notifying that it is during the ineffective period changes (growth) and when the image for notifying that it is during the ineffective period is removed due to the same type of effect. There may be. In other words, by performing an action effect that changes an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period, it is informing that the ineffective period is in effect, as in the case where the removal effect is executed. There may be a case where an image to be deleted is removed. That is, when a certain effect (effect having both the effect of action effect and the effect of removal effect) is executed, an image such as a button may or may not change, and a notification is made that it is in an ineffective period. There may be times when the image is changed, when it is removed, and when nothing happens. It may be removed after the change (for example, after the change from “translucent case” to “ice”, the “ice” after the change is removed). Note that the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period has been described as being removed or not removed. However, the removal has steps, and may be removed step by step. In other words, when an effect (effect having both effects and removal effects) or removal effect is executed, the “ice” is broken a little, and again, an effect (effect having both effects and removal effects) or removal. When the effect is executed, the “ice” may be completely broken and removed. In addition, when the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period is in the middle of removal, it may not be changed, may be changed, and may return to the original state after the change, The state in the middle may be maintained after the change. For example, if the “translucent case” is slightly cracked, it may not be changed to “ice”, it may be changed to “ice” that is not cracked, or “ice” that is slightly cracked. It may change.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the hold data (1st hold information) of a 1st special figure game and the hold data (2nd hold information) of a 2nd special figure game are not distinguished, it is digested in order of winning ( 18), the second hold information may be preferentially digested.

  In the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10. As shown in FIG. 28B and FIG. 28A, a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 (ie 100 % And 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, but the number of rounds may be three or more types. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that provides only a probable big hit as the big hit type is shown, but as described above, a gaming machine that includes a non-probable big hit (normal big hit) as the big hit type may be used.

  In the above embodiment, a mode in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating “0” to “8” and symbols indicating “−” are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed has been described. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed may be different from the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as variable display results, and among the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived and displayed as variable display results May be included. In addition, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which variable display is executed using only one type of special symbols may be used. As variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (turning on / off alternately may be repeated). That is, the repeated display of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed last (lit), or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be. The same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, normal symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it is made to control to a big hit game state based on having displayed the big hit symbol in the 1st special symbol display apparatus 4A and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B, it controls to a big hit game state The mode to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start prize opening or in the second start prize opening, and the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the entry (passing) of the game ball into the specific area. You may stay.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change pattern designation command is used when the change is started. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the change pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control in the variable display may be performed on the effect control board 12 side based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variation category determination table) and is extracted from the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random value determination table and determines the random value determination process (determination of whether or not to become a big hit, determination of the variation category, and big hit. In the example, the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned random number determination table is stored in the effect control board 12, and the random value itself is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (for example, an effect control command that can specify the random value from the main board 11). The effect control board 12 receives the random value itself extracted in the main board 11, and refers to the random value determination table based on the received random value. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12. Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number values and execute the random number determination process, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the presentation control board 12 receives the random number values (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not to win the jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot and also determines the random value. You may make it receive the determination result of the fluctuation | variation category determined with the main board | substrate 11 based on (MR3). That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

  In addition, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or changing the update range of the random numbers.

  In addition, for example, to a gaming machine that gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recorded information on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. In addition, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (for example, including structures, arrays, etc.). That is, the determination values (determination values) to be compared with the extracted random number values may be stored together in the ROM 101, but may be stored in a distributed (scattered) manner at a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. Alternatively, a mathematical expression or a program that outputs a result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 6) when the extracted random number value is input may be stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table stored in the ROM 121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.). For example, the slot machine to which the present invention is applied performs detection means (production buttons) capable of detecting the player's action and specific display corresponding to the detection means (production button images simulating production buttons). Specific display executing means, and the specific display executing means is more advantageous for the player than the first specific display (the button image for production (white)) and the first specific display as the specific display. (For example, a high expectation of becoming a bonus or the like) The second specific display (effect button image (red)) can be displayed, and after the first specific display is displayed, the effect that acts on the specific display May be a slot machine capable of displaying the second specific display.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  As another gaming machine according to the present invention, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, or the like) capable of playing a game, and the player's operation. Detectable detection means (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, etc.) and a predetermined display (timer display of FIG. 58, etc.) perform a predetermined operation (timekeeping operation etc.) and a specific mode The predetermined display means (the microcomputer 90100 for effect control, the processing during the effect symbol variation of FIG. 55, S90922, S90934, etc. of FIG. 62) for displaying that the timer display becomes “0” display mode, etc. When a specific mode is reached (such as when the timer display is “0”), multiple types of specific effects (high expectation expectation indication or low expectation indication table) Etc.) can be executed (FIGS. 57 (B), (C)) specific effect execution means (production control microcomputer 90100, effect symbol variation processing in FIG. 55, etc.) Specific display corresponding to detection means (for example, small button (white) D1, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4, small button (white) shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38) D1U, large button (white) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc.) specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S529), variable display effect processing (S172), etc.) The specific display execution means includes, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D1) and the like, and an advantage (for example, a big hit expectation, 16 The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white) D1) having a high expectation level that is a probable big hit (see FIG. 7), a normal big hit and an expected degree that is a probable big hit when there is a probable big hit In this case, the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D2, the second specific display is the large button (white) (Red) D3, stick D4, etc. When the first specific display is a large button (red) D3, the second specific display can be displayed as a stick D4, etc., and the ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, In T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 32C). Display a small button (white) D1 Thereafter, the small button (white) D1 is changed to a large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 33 (G), and the large button (white) D2 is changed to a large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. (Red) D3), and the second specific display after the change (for example, FIG. 33 (J)) in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). As shown in FIG. 33 (K), an operation effect using a large button (red) D3, a large button (red) D3U, etc. (for example, as shown in FIG. ) Is performed, and the predetermined display means displays the predetermined display when the first period (such as 25 seconds in FIG. 57B) has elapsed. The first display (display of the first effect in FIG. 57B, etc.) or the first period When the long second period (60 seconds in FIG. 57C) has elapsed, the second display in which the predetermined display becomes the specific mode (display of the third effect in FIG. 57C, etc.) is displayed. The production is controlled so that the proportion of the specific display displayed is higher during the second period than during the first period (as shown in FIGS. 59C to 59E). In addition, the third effect with a long timer period is set to have a higher ratio of executing the operation effect than the first effect with a short timer period, the total number of operations is set, and the number of operations per unit time is reduced. There is a gaming machine that is further provided with production control means.

  According to the above configuration, the production effect is improved. In addition, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom in the production. In particular, since the ratio in which the specific display is executed is higher during the second period having a longer period, it is possible to sufficiently secure the period during which the specific display mode is changed.

  In the above gaming machine, the specific display mode may be changed from the first specific display to the second specific display when the first period or the second period elapses. Further, the specific display mode may be changed a plurality of times during the first period or the second period.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the production effect and reduce the boring of the player to the production, a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs a predetermined game, The motion detection means (push sensor 90124, tilt direction sensor unit 90123, etc.) capable of detecting the player's motion (operation, etc.) and the predetermined display (timer display of FIG. 58, etc.) perform the predetermined operation (timekeeping operation, etc.). Predetermined display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, processing during effect symbol variation in FIG. 55, S90922, S90934 in FIG. 62, etc.) for displaying in a specific mode (timer display “0” display mode, etc.) and the predetermined When the display is in the specific mode (such as when the timer display is “0”), a plurality of types of specific effects (high expectation expectation indication or Among the low expectation level indications, etc., the specific effect execution means (the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect pattern of FIG. 55) that can execute any specific effect (FIGS. 57B and 57C). Based on the detection result of the motion detecting means and the motion detection means, the motion corresponding effect means (effect control) capable of executing the action corresponding effect corresponding to the player's action (the operation corresponding effect in FIGS. 57 and 58). Microcomputer 90100, effect symbol variation processing in FIG. 55, S90927, S90929 in FIG. 62, etc.), and the predetermined display means is when the first period (such as 25 seconds in FIG. 57B) has elapsed. The first display in which the predetermined display is the specific mode (display of the first effect in FIG. 57B) or the second period longer than the first period (60 seconds in FIG. 57C). Has passed It is possible to perform the second display (the display of the third effect in FIG. 57C, etc.) in which the predetermined display is the specific mode, and during the second period than during the first period. The effect is controlled so that the rate at which the motion-related effect is executed is higher (as shown in FIGS. 59C to 59E), the third effect with a longer timer period has a shorter timer period. And the like, the ratio of executing the operation effects is set higher, the total number of operations is set larger, and the number of operations per unit time is set higher). Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Other form examples may be referred to as “embodiments”.

[Other first embodiment]
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 42 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 viewed from the front. FIG. 43 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 907. The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 906). In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 902. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903, an extra ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 for emitting the hitting ball, and the like are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 907 is formed on the front surface of the game board 906 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 904 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray body, for example, A stick controller 90122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 90122 is provided with a predetermined operation finger by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 44) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 44) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like with respect to the trigger button 90125 is provided inside an operation rod of the stick controller 90122. Built-in). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 44) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan main body and the like below the stick controller 90122. The stick controller 90122 incorporates a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 44) for causing the stick controller 90122 to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is, for example, a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 90122). A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 44) for detecting the player's operation action on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 90120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 42, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 as the position approached to either the left or right in the upper plate and the lower plate, while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example. As operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 is provided as a first display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 908a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified respectively, A second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 908b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of displaying numbers and characters in a variable manner. The effect display device 909 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and an effect symbol display area is provided on the display screen for effect display variation display in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is done. In the effect symbol display area, a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols for left, middle, and right is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display device 908b performs the first display. 2 When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, in the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has a first start winning opening 9013). Or after passing through the second start winning opening 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved storage is not 0 and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed) The display is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) is started, and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  When the jackpot display result (big jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the derived display is performed, the effect display device 909 also displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 909, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have been continuously provided for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) In the state where it is in agreement with the combination of symbols), it is stopped, rocking, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or multiple symbols are displayed synchronously in the same symbol, or the positions of the symbols are switched An effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the variation display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable display areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning port 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the first start opening switch 9013a.

  A variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning port 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 9013. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 9014 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the second start opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 9014 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, it is easier for a game ball to win the second start winning port 9014 than the first starting winning port 9013. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 9014. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 9013 than the second starting winning port 9014. Note that in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserved storage number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 9018b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, further above the second special symbol storage memory display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 9018a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a hitting operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball into the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 9013 and is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 908a starts the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 9013. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 9014 and is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 908b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 909 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 908b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect display device 909 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, at a lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number). , A hold display area, not shown). In the combined hold storage display unit, the hold storage number can be specified as the hold storage display by, for example, the number of display of the predetermined image, by displaying the hold storage image (one hold storage image corresponding to each hold storage information, Is specified). In this way, by providing the summation pending storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In each of the first special symbol on-hold storage display 9018a, the second special symbol on-hold storage display 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of on-hold storage are on hold display or on hold. Called memory display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 9021 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 9023.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 909, there is provided a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the display change of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 9032, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  An accessory 9012 as a movable body is provided above the effect display device 909. The accessory 9012 is located between the game board 906 and the effect display device 909 and is operated by an accessory motor 9017 as a drive source, and the position can be displaced. The accessory 9012 is located in a place where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize when not operating, and at a position (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 909) that can be visually recognized by the player when a predetermined effect is executed. Moving.

  At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. Also, four speakers 9027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides of the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 43, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variation time after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of releases in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or When the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the closed state is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability change state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state that is not the probability change state) as the special gaming state. The type (type) of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability jackpot”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state is controlled to a time-short state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-time-short state in association with the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise. Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of entering the variable winning ball device 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency that the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened in association with the probability changing state or the short time state. In some cases, the control is set to an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (increasing the frequency and increasing the frequency) in the variable winning ball apparatus 9015. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as will be described later, in the following description, it is mainly referred to as a high base state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed. Therefore, the winning frequency at the second start winning port 9014 is increased. As a result, the game ball becomes easier to start and win (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol displays 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 are easily established). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 9014 is increased, so that a gaming state in which the frequency at which the second starting condition is established and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 9014 is increased by the electric Chu support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting the winning by the variable winning ball device 9015, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a term indicating a combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state, “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used. Use. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 43, as the big hit for 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state. Normally, in the big hit, the non-probable change state continues for the period until the next big hit occurs, the condition that the short-time state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times, such as 100 fluctuation displays, and the next big hit It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of, occurs. The normal big hit may be controlled so as to become a big hit controlled in a non-probability changing state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electricity chew support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time-short state, and the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the jackpot gaming state. In the probabilistic big hit, such a high-precise base state is satisfied, whichever is earlier, a condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or a condition that the next big hit occurs. It continues for a period until.

  FIG. 44 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. FIG. 44 also shows a payout control board 9037 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. A game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 9057 included. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 9054 and a RAM 9055 are incorporated. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 90503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

  The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90503.

  An input driver circuit 9058 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. Also, an output circuit 9059 for driving a solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and a solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 for forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 9031.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 9010, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control is performed on the display 9018a, the second special symbol storage memory display 9018b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 9041.

  The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90100, a ROM 90102, a RAM 90103, a VDP 90109, an I / O port unit 90105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores an effect control program such as display control, data, and the like. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 controls display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 provides an effect control command for instructing the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077 that allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. And display control of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver substrate 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output substrate 9070. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 and is input to the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 90105, thereby causing the stick controller 90122 to vibrate. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the accessory 9090 by driving the accessory motor 9017 via a motor drive circuit (not shown).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 45, a random number type, an update range, a usage, and an addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R ′: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R ′ is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 ′ (MR1 ′): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 ′ (MR2 ′): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 ′ (MR3 ′): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 ′ (MR4 ′): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 ′ (MR5 ′): An initial value of random 4 ′ is determined (for determining a random 4 ′ initial value).

  In this embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R ′), the big hit type is one of these based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1 ′). The jackpot type is determined. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ′). Therefore, the random 1 ′ is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  The variation pattern is first determined using a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′) and included in the variation pattern type determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′). Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves reach.

  When the display result is out of order, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is in the short-time state or not in the short-time state. When this is the case, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time-short state is not, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when the time is not short, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected more frequently, and even when the reach type is selected, the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time is shorter than when not in the time-short state.

  In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, When the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol for variable display is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it do. For example, in the hold number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type having a short variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in a case where the hold number shortening control state is not set. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than that in the non-holding number shortening control state. In the hold number reduction control, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened even when the same change pattern type is selected as compared to the case where the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 46 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 46 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in (1), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot). Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 46A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  46B and 46C are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. FIG. 46 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as a first holding memory) based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 9013 (the first special symbol variable display is displayed). 1 is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when FIG. 46 (C) shows a case in which a big hit type is determined using a hold memory (also referred to as a second hold memory) based on a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 9014 (the second special symbol variable display is displayed). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables in FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1 ′), the type of jackpot is determined as either “normal jackpot” or “probability variable jackpot”, and is also referred to in determining the jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type judgment table of FIG. 46 (B), there are numerical values to be compared with the random 1 ′ values, and judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probability big hit” (jackpot type). Judgment value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (C), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 ′ values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probability big hit” (jackpot type). Judgment value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 46B and 46C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value for which the random 1 ′ value matches as the jackpot type, and also uses the jackpot symbol for which the random 1 ′ value matches as the jackpot symbol. To decide. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 46 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 46 (C) have the same ratio determined for probability variation jackpots. In such a case, the big hit type determination table may not be divided between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the big hit type is selected from among a plurality of types of big hits having different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. You may set so that the ratio by which the big hit type with many round numbers is selected becomes higher than the 1st special symbol big hit type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the big hit type selection is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (C) may have a higher ratio determined for probability variation jackpots than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (B). . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can be more likely to be a big hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a variation pattern table used to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a table format.

  In FIG. 47, (a) shows a determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state, and (b) shows a determination table at the time of deviation from the short time state. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. 47A to 47D are stored in the ROM 9054, selected according to the gaming state, and used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 47 includes a variation pattern type determination table that indicates the relationship between the random 2 ′ and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between the random 3 ′ and the variation patterns belonging to various types for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 47, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  In addition, “normal reach” in each table of FIG. 47 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach that does not perform particularly flashy effects when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (the big win becomes the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach). (Possibility) is high.

  The “expectation” is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is an expectation degree (a ratio to be a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) that shifts to the probability variation state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined effect is displayed on the effect display device 909 until the display result is derived and displayed after the start of each variable display of the effect symbol as identification information and the first and second special symbols. There is a case where an effect called a pseudo-continuous effect (hereinafter referred to as a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. A pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed instead of a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. The temporary stop and re-variation are executed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, and right). For example, the greater the number of repeated re-executions (the total number of changes including the initial change and subsequent re-changes, also referred to as the pseudo-variable number of times), the greater the reliability of the big hit (the difference from the big hit) The ratio of the ratio that is selected when the jackpot is large, the ratio of the ratio that is jackpot, that is, the degree of reliability that is the jackpot) is increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when the jackpot is determined to be high suggests whether or not the jackpot gaming state is to be achieved by a pseudo-continuous effect. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, pseudo-continuous symbols (for example, symbols (numerals) attached with predetermined characters or characters, etc., which are not included in the effect symbols that are normally variable displayed (basically variable display) on the effect display device 909). )) Are temporarily stopped. It should be noted that in the quasi-continuation, the effect symbol (numerical symbol in the present embodiment) that normally displays variation (basically variation display) may be temporarily stopped. A combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 909 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo consecutive eyes (pseudo consecutive chances)) consisting of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. What should I do?

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, there may be an effect that the effect symbol slides. Here, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display. In the second super reach, the reach appearance (reach) is reached by stopping after one of the two production symbols that have been temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas due to a slippage (combination of the symbols). The effect is such that a reach effect is executed.

  Note that the variation pattern shown in the loss determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “out”. The variation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of “probability variation jackpot”.

  Based on this information, for example, the variation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that the variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds.

  In the table of FIG. 47, the fields “Random 2 ′ range” and “Variation pattern type” are described as a variation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 2 ′ range” and “Variation pattern type”. It is a column indicating a function. For example, taking FIG. 47 (a) as an example, all values of random 2 ′ (1 to 251) are assigned to each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. Allocation is divided into multiple numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 47 (a) as an example, the random 2 ′ value extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values 1 to 251. Then, “normal reach” is determined as the variation pattern type.

  In the table of FIG. 47, the fields described as “Random 3 ′ range” and “Fluctuation pattern” function as a variation pattern determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 3 ′ range” and “Variation pattern”. It is a column which shows. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 47 (a) as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “first super reach”. “4 Super Reach”.

  All of the random 3 ′ (1 to 220) values are assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type in a plurality of numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 47 (a) as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is selected, random 3 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 to 220 of random values. If it matches one of the determination values assigned to 1 to 70, it is determined that the variation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is set.

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is off, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the variation pattern. In the non-short-time state, when the variation display result is out of place, the normal state out-of-state determination table of FIG. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of time in the time reduction state, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. 47B is selected. It should be noted that by using the determination tables of FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), the reach ratio at the time of deviation from the normal state and from the short-time state is constant regardless of the number of holds.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time is short or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 47 (c) is selected. When the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit regardless of whether the time is short or not, the probable big hit judgment table of FIG. 47 (d) is selected.

  47B is set to be shorter than the normal state shift table shown in FIG. 47A in the normal state shift time determination table. 47B is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) compared to the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 47A. So that the percentage determined for normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations resulting in deviation display results instead of reaching reach)) is low, and the percentage determined for reach fluctuations with longer fluctuation times than normal fluctuations is low. Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-short state (normal state), the rate of change in the short-time state is higher in the time-short state, so the time-short state is the non-time-short state. The change display is performed with a change time shorter than that in the mean time. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-short state than in the non-time-short state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-short state.

  In the determination tables shown in FIGS. 47A and 47B that are selected when there is a loss, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been. On the other hand, in the determination tables shown in FIGS. 47 (c) and 47 (d) that are selected when a big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, the ratio of super reach reach production (the ratio of super reach reach production when a reach is selected) is higher when a big hit is made than when it is out of reach. The performance can increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the determination table shown in FIG. 47 (d) that is selected when a probable big hit out of the big hits has a normal reach compared to the determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability is a big hit, the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach (the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than the case of the normal big win. By performing the reach of reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a promising big hit.

  Note that such a variation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storage (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that display variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is longer than when the total number of pending storage is less than the predetermined number It is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control for shortening. However, the expectation for reach can be maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of stored holds is 3 or more). In addition, only the super reach in the reach may not be shortened so as to execute the hold time reduction control. Furthermore, the short time control of the number of holdings may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be used.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. The game control microcomputer 90560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in accordance with the game control state, as shown in FIG.

  48, main commands will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol displayed in a variation on the effect display device 909 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used as shown in FIG. 47, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls the effect display device 909 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state start for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command that indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designation command after opening the big prize opening indicating the opening (closing) of the big prize opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting win has been received. Command A 402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been a second start winning.

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Command C0XX (H) is a combined pending storage number designation command indicating the combined pending storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the total reserved memory number designation command is issued at the time of starting winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, when a start opening switch passing process described later is executed). Then, it is sent to the production control microcomputer 90100 (see S901221 and S901232 in FIG. 52). In addition, the combined pending storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the time of starting the variable display (for example, when executing the special symbol variable display processing described later). Note that the combined pending storage designation command and the pending storage count subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, a combined reserved memory number designation command may be used as a command that can specify the number of reserved memories after subtraction. Note that the command for specifying the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is transmitted instead of the total reserved memory number, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. May be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, etc. This is an effect control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random value for variation pattern type determination among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see S901217 and S901228 in FIG. 52), whether the game control microcomputer 90560 is a big hit at the start winning, whether the big hit type, the random number for determining the variation pattern type It is determined which range of the determination value is in the range. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit and a value for designating the type of the big win are set, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. A value for designating a range of a judgment value as a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 90560.

  FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 9055 (the area in the RAM 9055), and as shown in FIG. 49A, the maximum value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number (in this example, 8). ) Is reserved. FIG. 49A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), the reserved specific area is “first” or “second” in the order of winning based on winning in the first starting winning port 9013 or the second starting winning port 9014. The indicated data is set. Therefore, data that can specify the winning order to the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 is stored in the reserved specific area. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  FIG. 49B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area (hold storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold storage. As shown in FIG. 49B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R ′) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ′) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination. The random number for random use (random 2 ′) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3 ′) are stored.

  Based on winning in the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, A process of saving (storing) in the saving area in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, based on the winning at the first start winning opening 9013, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, based on the winning at the second start winning opening 9014, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In this manner, storing the information related to the start winning as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “hold stored”. In addition, numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer may be referred to as first reserved storage information, and numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as second reserved storage information. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in advance in the storage area, but will be described later. You may make it extract in a process (at the time of the change start of a special symbol).

  The data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area in this way is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display. Before starting the variable display, the data stored in the hold specific area and the storage area is read out at the time of start winning, and the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is started. It may be used for pre-reading notice effects that can be executed based on the hold information of the variable display.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 9013 or the second start prize opening 9014, commands such as a symbol designation command, a variation type command, and a combined pending memory number designation command are sent from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. Sent. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, various commands such as the received symbol designation command, variation type command, and total pending memory number designation command can be stored in association with each other. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach It is composed of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effects, etc., or various effect operations that are not accompanied by display changes of effect symbols. The notice effect control pattern includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, gaming state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (random number circuit 90503 is initially set), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S9034 shown in FIG. 50 (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”). In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S9020). Next, detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: S9021). .

  Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 9041 is executed (S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032 and S9033. Execute.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination and a random number for jackpot type determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S9023). . The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S9024, S9025).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (S9026). In the special symbol process, a corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S9031: output processing).

  CPU 9056 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S9032).

  Further, CPU 9056 performs normal symbol display control processing for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of normal symbols in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S9033). Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S9034), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S9026). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S90312). Then, any one of S90300 to S90307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, as described above, the RAM 9055 stores on-hold storage data (first on-hold storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 9013. And a second reserved storage buffer for storing reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 9013a is turned on, the number of the first reserved storage data is stored on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). 1 is incremented by 1 and the numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from the random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. (Random number for use) is extracted, and processing for storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 9014a is on, the second number of stored second stored data is counted on condition that the second number of stored storage has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1 and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed.

  The processing of S90300 to S90307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S90300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S90301) determines the variation pattern (variation pattern type determination random number and variation pattern determination random number using the variation pattern determination random number) and measures the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol changing process (S90303) is a process of proceeding to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S90304) displays the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b when the fluctuation time corresponding to the decided fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The pre-opening process for the big winning opening (S90305) is a process for performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S90306), the control for transmitting the presentation control command for the round display production in the big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 90100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening are confirmed. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the big prize opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (S90305). When all the rounds are finished, the process proceeds to the big hit end process (S90307). The big hit end process (S90307) is a process for performing control or the like for causing the microcomputer 90100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 9013a is in an ON state (S901212). If the first start port switch 9013a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S901222. If the first start port switch 9013a is on, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (S90112). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S901222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S901213), and sets the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S901214). In addition, the CPU 9056 stores the total pending storage in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specific area) for storing the winning order to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 described in FIG. Data indicating “first” is set in an area corresponding to the value of the number counter (S901215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 9013a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 9013), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 9014a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 9014), data indicating “second” is set. For example, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 9056 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 9013a is turned on. When the second start port switch 9014a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 9013 or The data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the second start winning opening 9014. Therefore, the winning order to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 is stored in the hold storage specifying information storage area (hold specifying area).

  Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 49B) (see FIG. 49B). S901216). In the processing of S901216, the jackpot determination random number (random R ′), the jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ′), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′). Are extracted and stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a prize presentation effect process that preliminarily determines a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when a fluctuation based on the detected start prize is executed (S901217). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S901218), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (S901219). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901220), sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data, and outputs the total pending storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 90100 is performed (S901221).

  By executing the processing of S901218 and S901219, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) Each time a start winning is made in the start winning opening 9013, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 occurs by executing the processing of S901218 to S901221, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the second start port switch 9014a is on (S901222). If the second start port switch 9014a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 9014a is on, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (S901223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S901224) and sets the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S901225). In addition, the CPU 9056 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (S901226).

  Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 49B) (see FIG. 49B). S901227). In the processing of S901227, the big hit determination random number (random R ′), the big hit type determination random number (random 1 ′), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) ′) Is extracted and stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes prize-winning effect processing (S901228). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S901229), and control to transmit the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Is performed (S901230). In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901231), sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data, and outputs the total pending storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 90100 is performed (S901232).

  By executing the processing of S901229 and S901230, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) Each time a start winning prize is received in the start winning opening 9014, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 occurs by executing the processing of S901229 to S901232, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S90300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 9056 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S9051). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, a customer waiting state designation command for designating the customer waiting state mode is sent if the customer waiting state designation command has not yet been transmitted. Processing for transmission is performed (S9077), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. Here, when a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting state designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting state designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after sending the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting state designation command has already been sent based on the fact that the customer waiting state designation command sent flag has been set. It is controlled not to send the wait state specification command. Such a customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag is reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 9056 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 49A) is “first”. It is confirmed whether or not the data indicates (S9052). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in S9052), the CPU 9056 displays the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol (S9053). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in S9052), the CPU 90103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (S9054).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is set according to whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the second special symbol display on the second special symbol display 908b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 908a performs variable display of the first special symbol on the basis of the reserved storage data stored in the first reservation storage buffer. It is. On the other hand, when data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 908b based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer. Is done.

  By executing the processing of S9052 to S9054, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055 (S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  After executing the processing of S9056, the count value of the total pending storage number counter that is formed in the RAM 9055 and counts the total pending storage number is decremented by 1 (S9057). Note that the CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055, and shifts the contents stored in the pending specific storage area.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 9056 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1. Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 9013, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 9014 Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S90300-S90307 can be made common in the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R ′ (a jackpot determination random number) from the holding storage buffer, and executes a jackpot determination module (S9061). In this case, the CPU 9056 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S901216 of the start port switch passing process or S901227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, To do. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 46) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 46A in the ROM 9054 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 46A in the ROM 9054 is set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 9056 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state. When the state is short or short, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R ′) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 46A, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S9061), the process proceeds to S9071. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the jackpot end process (S90307 in FIG. 51) when the probability variation jackpot is reached, and then the condition that the next jackpot has been determined or the variation display that results in an outlier display result. When the condition that the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) has been executed is satisfied, the variation display of the special symbol is terminated and the stop symbol is reset at the timing to stop display.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in S9061), the process proceeds to S9075 described later.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′) matches any of the jackpot determination values in S9061, the CPU 9056 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (S9071). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 46 (B) and the second special symbol big hit type of FIG. 46 (C). One of the determination tables is selected (S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in the start switch passing process and stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in advance, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in S9072 to hold it. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the random number (random 1 ′) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer is determined (S9073).

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type, Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control corresponding to the big hit type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the big hit type data indicating the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 9055 (S9074). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as the jackpot type data. When the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the big hit type data.

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a special symbol stop symbol (S9075). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−”, which is a lost symbol, is set as a special symbol stop symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in S9073 is set as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be “probable variation jackpot”, “7” is set as a special symbol stop symbol. When the jackpot type is determined as “normal jackpot”, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S90301) (S9076).

  In the display result designation command transmission process (S90302) described above, the CPU 9056 selects any one of the display result 1 designation command to the display result 3 designation command for designating the display result in accordance with the determined type of jackpot or loss. Control for transmitting the effect control command (see FIG. 48).

  In the special symbol changing process (S90303) described above, the CPU 9056 decrements the variable time timer by 1, and when the variable time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (S90304). Update to the value and proceed to the special symbol stop process.

  As a result of the variable display, when the big win is achieved, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (S90305), the big winning opening open processing (S90306), and the big winning end processing (S90307) are executed to control the big winning game state. Is done. In the big hit end process (S90307), the probability change flag and the hourly flag are set when the probability change big hit ends, and the hourly flag is set when the normal big hit ends. As a result, after the end of the probable big hit, the state is controlled to the probable change state and the short time state, and after the normal big hit, it is controlled to the short time state.

  It is necessary to continue the time-short state after the probable big hit and the normal big hit until one of the conditions of the change display is executed 100 times and the next big hit occurs. In such a duration of 100 fluctuation displays, in the jackpot ending process (S90307), a time-count counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time-saving state is set to 100, and thereafter, the fluctuation display is executed. The special time stop process is performed by subtracting and updating. Based on the fact that the time reduction counter has counted up, the time reduction flag is reset to control to end the time reduction state.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S90701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify received commands in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 90103, etc.) is performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (S90705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of effect symbols on the effect display device 909 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control among the processes according to the control state A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, random numbers (SR1-1 ′ for determining the left stop symbol for the effect symbol, SR1-2 ′ for determining the middle stop symbol for the effect symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol for the effect symbol, which are used by the effect control microcomputer 90100. -3 ', SR2' for determining the region effect execution, SR3 'for determining the region effect execution timing, SR4' for determining the first region effect, SR5 'for determining the second region effect) A random number update process for updating the count value is executed (S90706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 ′ to SR5 ′ is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each. By being extracted at a predetermined timing, it is used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S90707).

  By performing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits an effect display device 909, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 and received. By controlling the production devices such as the speakers 9027L and 9027R, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the pre-read effect process (S90500) for determining whether to perform the pre-read effect and selecting the type of the pre-read effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on the process, any one of S90800 to S90807 is performed.

  In the effect control process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S90500) is a process of performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. The pre-reading effect is a special symbol change based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold information (holding storage information) comes. This is a production technique such as determining the contents of the display and giving a notice in advance of how the future special symbols will change. For example, when the hold information is a jackpot, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the jackpot may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display based on the hold information as the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target fluctuation display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process for performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S90801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) to be started. The effect symbol variation processing (S90802) is processing for performing processing for controlling switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S90803) is a process of performing control for stopping the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The jackpot display process (S90804) is a process of performing display control such as a control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of the jackpot after the end of the variation time. The round process (S90805) is a process for performing display control during a round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to post-round processing, and if the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing. The post-round processing (S90806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing. The jackpot end effect process (S90807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended in the effect display device 909.

  The effect control CPU 90101 is a process stored in the ROM 90102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the table, an effect device (effect parts) such as the effect display device 909 is controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S90801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display result is determined to be off (S90601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S90602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the display result of the loss that does not become reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the loss symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 90102 (S90604). The process proceeds to S90616. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1-1 ′ to SR1-3 ′ is associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S90604, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 ′ to SR1-3 ′ at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted numerical data is left using the outlier symbol determination data table. , Determined to be a combination of stop symbols that will result in variable display of the middle and right effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reach symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with a combination of accidental jackpot symbols, it is corrected so as to be a combination of outlier symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by one symbol). In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally reached, it is corrected so that it becomes a combination of non-reach off symbols (for example, correction by shifting the right symbol by one symbol) and each stop symbol. Is determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S90602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the reach symbol combination is determined (S90605), and the process proceeds to S90616. In the processing of S90605, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 ′ to SR1-3 ′ at a predetermined timing, and the random symbol extracted from SR1-1 ′ is dealt with by using the data design data for detachment symbol determination. The symbols to be processed are determined as stop symbols for the left and right effect symbols that form the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 'is determined as the stop symbol for the middle symbols. The In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  In addition, when it is not determined to be shifted in the processing of S90601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N of S90601), the effect control CPU 90101 displays the big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. A stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the combination is determined (S90603), and the process proceeds to S90616.

  In S90603, a winning symbol combination is determined according to the type of jackpot as follows. Based on which display result designation command of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area, the type of jackpot between the probability big hit and the normal big hit When it is determined that it is determined to be a probable big hit, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 ′ at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 ′ and a probable big hit symbol (for example, Using the data table (probability big hit symbol determination table) in which the relationship with the left, middle, and right is a combination of odd numbers such as “7, 7, 7”, etc. The combination of jackpot symbols is selected and determined. Further, when it is determined that it is determined to be a normal jackpot, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 ′ at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 ′ and a normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, Using the data table (ordinary jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship between the middle and right is an even combination of even numbers such as “4, 4, 4”, etc. The combination of is selected and determined. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, a process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, a process for setting various effects such as a dynamic display effect (including a variable display mode such as a pseudo-ream) and a pre-reading effect) of the effect symbol) After performing the effect setting process (S90616) to be performed, the process proceeds to S90617.

  In S90617, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S90617, the symbol variation control pattern table according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and the various effect control (effect operations) patterns designated by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of S90616, etc. One of the effect control patterns corresponding to the designated various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern from among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 90102, for example, the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 in the period from the start of the change of the effect symbol until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a display operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, an effect display operation by a pseudo-series effect, and an effect display operation in a notice effect are stored as symbol variation control patterns.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S90617 is selected (S90618). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S90619).

  When the processing of S90619 is executed, control of the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027, etc.) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is started (S90620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 90109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 909. A control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 9070 in order to output audio from the speaker 9027.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation display time timer (S90621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing (S90802). The symbol variation start process is executed (S90622).

[First example of timer production]
Next, a first example of a timer effect will be described. As a first example of the timer effect, when the predetermined display performs a predetermined operation and displays in a specific mode, and when the predetermined display is in the specific mode, any one of the multiple types of specific effects is displayed. An example of effect control to be executed will be described.

  As the “display in which the predetermined display performs a predetermined operation and becomes a specific mode”, a display in which the timer numerical value display performs a time measurement operation and becomes a time measurement end mode is displayed as in the timer display. As “the effect of executing any one of the multiple types of specific effects when the predetermined display is in the specific mode”, a predetermined image is displayed when the timer display is in the timed end mode. By doing so, an effect of executing any one of a plurality of types of expectation suggestion display effects suggesting an expectation degree that is advantageous for the player is performed. As an example of the predetermined image in that case, for example, in order to suggest that an event occurs to the player, a character indicating a predetermined suggestion such as “READY GO” or “START” is displayed. Alternatively, a display such as an action display by a predetermined character image may be displayed. Further, either one of the character display and the action table may be executed, or both may be executed. In addition, as “the effect of executing any one of a plurality of types of specific effects when the predetermined display becomes a specific aspect”, a predetermined image is displayed after displaying the timing end mode. Alternatively, a specific effect may be executed.

  FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the execution execution timing of the first example of the timer effect. FIG. 57A shows an example of effect execution timing in a predetermined variation pattern in which a timer effect can be executed a plurality of times during one variation display. FIG. 57 (B) shows an example of the execution timing of the first effect in FIG. 57 (A). FIG. 57 (B) shows an example of the execution timing of the third effect in FIG. 57 (A).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (A), for example, at the time of variable display of a specific super reach such as the above-described fourth super reach, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect that can execute the timer effect. A plurality of types of effects are executed during one fluctuation display. The length of the execution period of a plurality of types of effects is set in a short / long relationship of “first effect <second effect <third effect”. In the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect period, a selection is made from a plurality of types of specific effects such as a plurality of types of expectation suggestion display effects. The performed effect is executed.

  For the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, the case where the timer effect is executed and the case where the timer effect is not executed are selected by lottery. An effect mode is distinguished by calling an effect, when a timer effect is not executed, is called a timer non-effect.

  In FIG. 57 (B), for the first effect shown in FIG. 57 (A), (B1) shows the effect execution timing when the timer is present, and (B2) is the effect execution timing when the timer is not effected. It is shown. In the first effect shown in FIG. 57 (B), the effect period is shorter than the other effects, and the background color suggests the expected degree of jackpot as an expectation suggestion display after 25 seconds from the start of the effect period. The effect of displaying the image of is performed.

  The background color refers to the image color of the background image that constitutes the background of the effect design among the images displayed on the effect display device 9. The background color is a color (for example, yellow) other than blue and red before the first performance is executed. In the first effect, the effect with the timer in FIG. 57 (B1) and the effect with no timer in (B2) are both performed for 25 seconds from the start of the effect period (first effect period) of the first effect. As the expectation level suggestion is displayed, an effect that the background color changes to red (red background) or blue (blue background) is performed. The relationship of “blue background <red background” is set for the level of expectation of jackpot due to the background color displayed in the expectation suggestion display. Whether to execute the timer-presented effect or the timer-less effect when the first effect is executed is determined by a lottery common to the first to third effects before the start of the variable display. It is decided collectively.

  When the timer effect of FIG. 57 (B1) is executed, a timer display image is displayed, and 25 seconds are counted from the start of the first effect. When the remaining time of the time measured by the timer display is 0 seconds and the time measurement of the timer ends, the action 9012 moves up and down in accordance with the end of the time measurement. Depending on the degree of expectation, either the red background or the blue background is selected and the effect of changing the background image color is executed.

  When the timer no effect of FIG. 57 (B2) is executed, the timer display image is not displayed. When 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first effect, the action 9012 is moved up and down unexpectedly, and an effect that changes the background image color by selecting a blue background is executed as an expectation indication. The

  In the timer-presented effect and the timer-unproduced effect when the first effect is executed, a similar image is displayed as an image displayed other than the timer display from the start of the first effect to 25 seconds. It should be noted that during the period from the start of the first effect to 25 seconds, an image that is partially different between the timer-presented effect and the non-timer effect may be displayed as an image other than the timer display.

  In the first effect, the expectation suggestion display is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the effect, whereby the effect of the effect can be improved. Since the degree of expectation is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the timered effect, the fun of the effect can be further improved. By performing the action of the accessory 9012 in accordance with the end of the timer display, it is possible to further improve the fun of the production. Since the proportion with the expectation suggestion display having a higher expectation level is executed in the timer-presented effect is higher than that in the non-timer effect, the player's sense of expectation when the timerd effect is executed can be enhanced.

  Note that when the timer non-production is executed, the expectation suggestion display may not be selectable. In addition, when the timer presence effect is executed, only the red background is displayed, and when the timer no effect is executed, either the red background or the blue background is selected and displayed according to the expectation level that is a big hit. You may do it. Further, the relationship between the expectation level and the expectation level indication between the timer-presented effect and the timer-less effect may be opposite to the above-described relationship (timer-less effect> timer-presented effect).

  In FIG. 57 (C), with respect to the third effect shown in FIG. 57 (A), (C1) shows the effect execution timing when there is a timer effect, and (C2) shows the effect execution timing when there is no timer effect. It is shown. In the third effect shown in FIG. 57 (C), the effect period is longer than the other effects such as the first effect, and the big hit expectation is displayed as an expectation suggestion display after 60 seconds from the start of the effect period. An effect of displaying an image of the operation means suggesting the degree is performed. In the third effect shown in FIG. 57 (C), effect control is performed such that the frequency of executing the operation effect is higher than other effects such as the first effect.

  The operation means is an operation means that is provided in a pattern such as a push button 90120 and a stick controller 90122 and can be operated by a player. In the third effect, in both the effects with the timer in FIG. 57 (C1) and the effects without the timer in (C2), 60 seconds from the start of the effect period (third effect period) of the third effect. At the elapse of time, an effect is displayed in which an image of a stick controller or an image of a push button is displayed as an expectation indication. The effect is also an operation promotion effect immediately before displaying the variable display result. When the operating means displayed during the effect is executed, an effect in which the variation display result is derived and displayed is executed.

  The relationship of “push button <stick controller” is set for the level of expectation of jackpot by the operating means displayed in the expectation suggestion display. Whether to execute the timer effect or the timer non-effect when the third effect is executed is determined by a lottery common to the first effect to the third effect before the start of the variable display. It is decided collectively.

  When the timer effect of FIG. 57 (C1) is executed, a timer display image is displayed, and 60 seconds are counted from the start of the third effect. When the remaining time of the time measured by the timer display is 0 seconds and the time of the timer is finished, an image indicating the stick controller and the push button are displayed according to the expected degree of the big hit as the expected degree suggestion display according to the end. One of the images is selected and the effect displayed in the center of the screen is executed.

  When the timer non-effect of FIG. 57 (C2) is executed, the timer display image is not displayed. When 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the third effect, an effect is displayed in which the push button image is selected and displayed unexpectedly as an expectation indication.

  The same image as an image displayed in addition to the timer display and operation effect display for 60 seconds from the start of the third effect in the timer-presented effect and the non-timer effect when executing the third effect. Is displayed. In addition, during the period from the start of the third effect to 60 seconds, as the image displayed other than the timer display and the operation effect display, an image that is partially different between the timer effect and the timer non-effect is displayed. Also good.

  In the third effect, in the timer-equipped effect, a plurality of times of the first operation effect to the fifth operation effect are provided at regular time intervals T (10 seconds) in a period from the start of the third effect to the lapse of 60 seconds. In some cases, the operation effect is executed. An operation effect is also referred to as an action-related effect, and when a predetermined operation means is operated by a player's operation within a predetermined detection valid period, a predetermined effect such as image display corresponding to the operation is executed. This is a production. The operation effect in the third effect can be executed at a specific rate as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the third effect, there is no case where the operation effect that is executed with the timer-presented effect is not executed in the timer-less effect.

  As the operation effects, five types of operation effects of the first operation effect to the fifth operation effect are executed. The first operation effect displays an image that promotes the operation of the push button 90120 (hereinafter referred to as button operation promotion display), and correspondingly, the push button 90120 is operated within a predetermined operation valid period. It is an effect to display a chance. Opportunity display means displaying an image that suggests a chance for the player. The second operation effect is an effect in which a button operation promotion display is performed and a reach display is performed in response to the push button 90120 being operated within a predetermined operation effective period accordingly. Reach display refers to displaying an image that suggests a reach state.

  The third operation effect displays an image that promotes the operation of the stick controller 90122 (hereinafter referred to as “stick operation promotion display”), and in response thereto, the stick controller 90122 is operated within a predetermined operation effective period. This is an effect of SP display. The SP display refers to displaying an image that suggests super reach. The fourth operation effect is an effect that displays the degree of expectation corresponding to the operation of the push button 90120 within a predetermined operation effective period in response to the button operation promotion display. The expectation% display means displaying an image that suggests the percentage of the big hit gaming state by the change display this time. The fifth operation effect is an effect in which stick operation promotion display is performed, and in response to the operation, the stick controller 90122 is operated within a predetermined operation effective period, and intense heat display is performed. The intense heat display means displaying an image that suggests that the degree of expectation that the current variation display becomes a big hit gaming state is extremely high (very high).

  Although illustration of the content of the second effect is omitted, for example, when the effect with timer is executed, an image of the timer display is displayed, and 40 seconds are counted from the start of the second effect. When the remaining time of the time measured by the timer display becomes 0 seconds and the time measurement of the timer ends, a plurality of types of jackpot warning characters (first warning character, first warning character, first warning character) The notice character selected from the image of (2 notice character) is displayed at a predetermined position. For example, the relationship of “first notice character <second notice character” is set for the expectation level of the jackpot of the notice character displayed in the expectation indication of the second effect. Whether to execute the timer-presented effect or the timer-unproduced effect when executing the second effect depends on the lottery common to the first to third effects before the start of the variable display. It is decided collectively.

  Also, each of the first effect and the second effect can be executed in the third effect at a predetermined ratio (the ratio is different) when the timer is present, as shown in FIGS. 59 (C) and (D). It is possible to execute an effect similar to an operation effect.

  In the third effect, the expectation suggestion display is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the effect, whereby the effect of the effect can be improved. Since the degree of expectation is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the timered effect, the fun of the effect can be further improved. By performing the action of the accessory 9012 in accordance with the end of the timer display, it is possible to further improve the fun of the production. Since the proportion with the expectation suggestion display having a higher expectation level is executed in the timer-presented effect is higher than that in the non-timer effect, the player's sense of expectation when the timerd effect is executed can be enhanced.

  Further, in the third effect, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced because a plurality of operation effects that the player can intervene by the operation are executed according to the progress of the timer effect. Can improve the interest of

  Further, in the third effect, the first operation effect to the fifth operation effect at regular intervals T (10 seconds) in the period from the start of the third effect to the lapse of 60 seconds. Since multiple operation effects may be executed, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom when a relatively long time is displayed in the timer display.

  Further, in the third effect, an operation corresponding effect according to the operation of different operation means can be executed, such as an operation effect according to the button operation and an operation effect according to the stick operation, according to the timer timing. Therefore, the player's boredom can be further reduced.

  Note that the expectation suggestion display may not be selectable when the timer no performance is executed. In addition, when the timer presence effect is executed, only the red background is displayed, and when the timer no effect is executed, either the red background or the blue background is selected and displayed according to the expectation level that is a big hit. You may do it. Further, the relationship between the expectation level and the expectation level indication between the timer-presented effect and the timer-less effect may be opposite to the above-described relationship (timer-less effect> timer-presented effect).

  Next, the effect image of the third effect will be described as an example of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 909 in the timer effect. FIG. 58 is a display screen diagram showing the effect image of the third effect when the timer effect is executed. 58A to 58L show examples of images displayed on the effect display device 9 in the third effect as time elapses. In FIG. 58, images having little relationship with timer effects such as hold display are omitted.

  In FIG. 58, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 indicate the state in which the variation is being displayed by a downward arrow. When the effect display device 909 executes the variable display, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 are started to be displayed in the center of the screen. When the timer effect is executed, a timer display area 9094 for displaying a timer by a numerical value in the timer effect, a timer display area 9094 in the timer effect, an operation promotion display, an operation corresponding display, etc. in the timer effect when the timer effect is executed. An operation effect display area 95 for displaying an image related to the operation effect is formed (provided).

  When 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of timer display in the third effect, as shown in FIG. 58A, the display value in the timer display area 9094 becomes 50 seconds, and accordingly, the operation effect display area 9095 is displayed. The button image imitating the push button 90120 and the character image “Press!” Are displayed as the button operation promoting image for promoting the operation of the push button 90120. The button operation promotion image is displayed over a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until an operation of the push button 90120 is detected.

  When an operation of the push button 90120 by the player is detected according to the operation promotion display of FIG. 58 (A), as shown in FIG. 58 (B), according to the operation corresponding display of the correspondence shown in FIG. A chance display in which a character image of “chance” is displayed is executed.

  When 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of timer display, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the display value in the timer display area 9094 becomes 40 seconds, and accordingly, the push button 90120 is displayed in the operation effect display area 9095. And a character image “Press!” Are displayed as a button operation promotion image. The button operation promotion image is displayed over a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until an operation of the push button 90120 is detected.

  When an operation of the push button 90120 by the player is detected according to the operation promotion display of FIG. 58 (C), as shown in FIG. 58 (D), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. Reach display in which the character image “reach” is displayed is performed, and the production symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 are in the reach display mode.

  When 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of timer display, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the display value in the timer display area 9094 becomes the remaining 30 seconds, and the stick controller 90122 is displayed in the operation effect display area 9095 accordingly. And a character image “Close!” Are displayed as a stick operation promoting image that promotes the operation of the stick controller 90122. The stick operation promotion image is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until an operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected.

  When an operation of the stick controller 90122 by the player is detected according to the operation promotion display of FIG. 58 (E), as shown in FIG. 58 (F), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. The SP display in which the character image “SP” is displayed is executed, and the SP character image 9096 used for the SP effect is displayed at the center of the screen. The SP effect character image 9096 is displayed in a battle (battle) battle effect mode in which an ally character (left character) serving as a player's ally and an enemy character (right character) serving as an enemy of the player are displayed. In the battle effect, the jackpot display result is derived and displayed when the teammate character wins, and the shift display result is derived and displayed when the teammate character loses. When the battle effect is executed, the effect symbols 9091, 9092, and 9093 are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the variable display is continued at the position of the movement destination.

  When 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of timer display, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the display value in the timer display area 9094 becomes 20 seconds, and accordingly, the push button 90120 is displayed in the operation effect display area 9095. And a character image “Press!” Are displayed as a button operation promotion image. The button operation promotion image is displayed over a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until an operation of the push button 90120 is detected.

  When an operation of the push button 90120 by the player is detected according to the operation promotion display of FIG. 58 (G), as shown in FIG. 58 (H), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. Expected% display in which the character image “80%” is displayed is executed, and the battle effect is continued.

  When 50 seconds have elapsed from the start of timer display, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the display value in the timer display area 94 is 10 seconds remaining, and the stick controller 90122 is displayed in the operation effect display area 95 accordingly. A stick image simulating the image and a character image “Close!” Are displayed as a stick operation promoting image. The stick operation promotion image is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until an operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected.

  When an operation of the stick controller 90122 by the player is detected according to the operation promotion display of FIG. 58 (I), as shown in FIG. 58 (J), according to the operation correspondence display of the correspondence shown in FIG. The intense heat display in which the character image of “Intense heat” is displayed is executed, and the battle effect is continued.

  When 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 58 (K), the display value of the timer display area 9094 becomes 0 seconds, and, for example, a stick controller 90122 is imitated in the center of the screen. An expectation suggestion display 9097 is displayed, which is a stick image and a character image “Close!”. The expectation level suggestion display 9097 is displayed for a predetermined period of 10 seconds or less until an operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected.

  If the player's operation of the stick controller 90122 is detected in response to the expectation level suggestion display 9097 in FIG. 58 (K), the teammate character wins in the battle effect when the jackpot display result is obtained, and the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. In accordance with the operation corresponding display, as shown in FIG. 58 (L), an effect of deriving and displaying the variation display result of the jackpot display result is executed. On the other hand, when the result is an outlier display result, the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect, and the effect of deriving and displaying the fluctuation display result of the outlier display result is executed.

  Next, when executing the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of a specific super reach, the selection of whether or not to execute the timer effect, and the operation effects in the first effect to the third effect when the timer effect is executed. A data table used for lottery for selecting whether or not to execute will be described.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of a fourth super reach timer effect selection table, an operation effect selection table for the first effect, an operation effect selection table for the second effect, and an operation effect selection table for the third effect. These data tables are stored in the ROM 90102 of the effect control microcomputer 90100. The selection ratio of effects described below may include a ratio that is not selected at all (0 ratio (0%)). In the description of the relationship between the selection ratios of effects, the ratio is “small”. May include a case where the selection ratio is “0% (0%)”. On the contrary, in the description of the magnitude relationship of the production selection ratio, the example in which the ratio is “large” may include the case where the selection ratio is “100% (100%)”.

  The fourth super reach timer effect selection table is used to select whether to execute the timer display presence effect or the timer display no effect when executing the variation pattern of the fourth super reach that is a specific super reach. Used for lottery. The fourth super reach timer presentation selection table is used when the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result, and the variable display result becomes a display result different from the fourth super reach timer presentation selection table in FIG. 59A. 59B, which is sometimes used, includes the off-set fourth super reach timer effect selection table.

  In the tables of FIGS. 59A and 59B, a total of 100 random effects SR2 ′ (numerical range of 0 to 99) for timer effect selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 90100. Numerical values are assigned to the timer display effect and the timer display effect. For SR2 ′, the number of assigned random number SR2 ′ values is shown for clarity.

  In the fourth super reach timer effect selection table at the time of big hit in FIG. 59 (A), the timer is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “timer display present effect> no timer display effect” according to the value of SR2 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio at which the decision to execute the display effect is selected is higher. On the other hand, in the fourth super-reach timer effect selection table at the time of losing in FIG. 59B, the magnitude relationship of “timer display present effect <timer display non-effect” is set according to the value of SR2 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio at which the decision to execute the timer display non-production is selected is higher.

  59A and 59B, when the variable display result is the jackpot display result, the ratio of determining that the timer display effect is to be executed, compared to the case of the off-line display result. Becomes higher. Thereby, when a timer display effect is performed, the expectation degree with respect to the big hit of a player can be raised compared with the time when a timer display no effect is performed.

  The operation effect selection table for the first effect in FIG. 59 (C) is selected when execution of the timer display effect is selected using the fourth super reach timer effect selection table in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B). This is used for a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect of the first effect. The operation effect selection table for the second effect in FIG. 59 (C) is selected when execution of the timer display effect is selected using the fourth super reach timer effect selection table in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B). This is used for a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect of the second effect. The operation effect selection table for the third effect in FIG. 59 (D) is selected when execution of the timer display effect is selected using the fourth super reach timer effect selection table in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B). This is used for a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect of the third effect.

  In each table of FIGS. 59C to 59E, a total of 110 random numbers SR3 ′ (numerical range of 0 to 109) for selection of operation effects as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 90100. Are assigned to the operation effect present and the operation effect absent. For SR3 ′, the number of assigned random number SR3 ′ values is shown for clarity.

  In the operation effect selection table for the first effect shown in FIG. 59C, “no operation effect” is selected so that the magnitude relationship of “operation effect present <no operation effect” is established according to the value of SR3 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the percentage of data being processed is higher. In the operation effect selection table of the second effect in FIG. 59 (D), the operation effect present and the operation are performed so that the magnitude relationship of “operation effect present = no operation effect” is established according to the value of SR3 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Data is set so that no performance is selected at the same rate. In the operation effect selection table of the third effect in FIG. 59 (E), the presence of the operation effect is selected so that the magnitude relationship of “operation effect present> no operation effect” is established according to the value of SR3 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the percentage of data being processed is higher. With such a table, data is set so that, in the first effect to the third effect, as the effect period is longer, the ratio of selecting the operation effect is higher.

  As shown in the table of FIG. 59C, in the first effect that displays the timer for 25 seconds, the total value of the number of operations when the operation effect is selected is 1, that is, 1 in 25 seconds. Operations are performed once. As shown in the table of FIG. 59D, in the second effect that displays the timer for 40 seconds, the total value of the number of operations when the operation effect is selected is 2, that is, 2 in 40 seconds. Operations are performed once. As shown in the table of FIG. 59 (E), in the third effect that displays the timer for 60 seconds, the total value of the number of operations when the operation effect is selected is 5, that is, 5 within 60 seconds. Operations are performed once.

  As described above, in the third effect that displays the timer for 60 seconds, when the operation effect is selected, the timer effect is displayed more than the third effect in which five operation effects are executed in 60 seconds. Two operation effects are executed in the second effect with a short period, and one operation effect is executed in the first effect in which the timer display is shorter than the second effect. Thus, even if the timer effect is executed during the same variable display, the data is set so that the longer the effect period, the higher the ratio (frequency) of executing the operation effect than the shorter effect period. Has been. As a result, even if the timer display is executed during the same variable display, even if the timer display has a long display period, the operation effect is set to a high frequency so that the player can The ratio (frequency) of intervening in the game becomes high, and it can be reduced that the player is bored with the performance.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (C) to 59 (E), it is possible to select that the operation effect is executed only when the timer display is present, and when the timer display effect is performed, the timer display effect is not performed. Since the frequency of operation effects is high, the execution rate (frequency) of effects in which the player can intervene is increased, thereby further reducing the player's boredom with the effects in the long-term timer display. Can do.

  Next, an example of an effect pattern including operation effects in the first effect to the third effect will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an effect pattern selection table for selecting the effect pattern of the third effect in a table format. FIG. 60A shows an effect pattern selection table for the third effect used at the time of the big hit, and FIG. 60B shows an effect pattern selection table for the third effect used at the time of the loss. These data tables are stored in the ROM 90102 of the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In each table of FIGS. 60A and 60B, a total of 90 random numbers SR4 ′ (numerical range of 0 to 89) for selection of presence / absence of operation effects as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 90100. Are assigned to the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, respectively. For SR4 ′, the number of assigned random numbers SR4 ′ is shown for the sake of clarity.

  In the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect at the time of big hit in FIG. 60 (A), the magnitude relationship of “first pattern> second pattern> third pattern” is established according to the value of SR4 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Data is set in. In the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect at the time of big hit in FIG. 60B, the magnitude relationship of “first pattern <second pattern <third pattern” is established according to the value of SR4 ′ extracted at a predetermined timing. Data is set in.

  A plurality of types of colors such as blue, green, and red in each operation effect shown in FIG. 60 is a color that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with a magnitude relationship of “blue <green <red”.

  In the first pattern, the operation effect pattern is a first operation effect in which a chance display is displayed according to the operation after the button operation promotion effect is executed, and the chance is displayed in green letters according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed. The second operation effect that is displayed, the third operation effect that is displayed in green letters according to the operation after the stick operation promotion display is performed, and the red character that is displayed according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed The fourth operation effect is displayed with the expected degree% of “80%”, and the fifth operation effect is displayed with intense heat according to the operation after the stick operation promotion display is performed. In the first pattern, the final effect executed as the expectation suggestion effect after the operation effect pattern is an effect in which the jackpot display result is derived and displayed in accordance with the operation after the big hit with the stick operation promotion display.

  The second pattern has the same first operation effect as the first pattern, the second operation effect that is displayed in blue letters according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed, and the first pattern. The same third operation effect, the fourth operation effect in which the expected degree% display of “70%” is displayed in green letters according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed, and the same fifth operation effect as the first pattern Consists of. In the second pattern, the same final effect as the first pattern is performed after the operation effect pattern.

  In the third pattern, the operation effect pattern is the same as the first operation effect, the second operation effect is the same as the second pattern, and after the stick operation promotion display is displayed, the SP display is displayed in blue letters. The third operation effect, the fourth operation effect in which the expected degree% of “60%” is displayed in green letters according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed, and the fifth operation same as the first pattern It consists of production. After the stick operation promotion display is made, it is constituted by a fifth operation effect in which intense heat display is performed according to the operation. In the third pattern, the same final effect as the first pattern is performed after the operation effect pattern.

  In the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect at the time of losing in FIG. 60 (B), the same first pattern to the third pattern set in the effect pattern selection table of the third effect at the time of big hit in FIG. 60 (A). 1 pattern to 3rd pattern is set, and as described above, data is set so that the selection ratio of these patterns is the selection ratio opposite to the selection ratio of the effect pattern selection table of the third effect at the time of big hit. Yes.

  In the above-mentioned second pattern, an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation of jackpot is higher than that in the above-described third pattern is executed during the operation effect. In the first pattern described above, an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation of jackpot is higher than that in the second pattern is executed during the operation effect. Therefore, in the effect pattern selection table for the third specific effect at the time of jackpot in FIG. 60A, the selection ratio is “first” so that an effect pattern having a higher expectation degree of jackpot can be easily selected when the jackpot display result is obtained. Data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “pattern> second pattern> third pattern”. On the other hand, in the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect at the time of losing in FIG. 60 (B), the selection ratio is set so that an effect pattern with a lower degree of expectation of the big hit is easily selected when the result is a display error. Data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “first pattern <second pattern <third pattern”.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the first effect, for example, in the operation effect display area 9095, a character such as “This change is highly expected” is displayed in blue according to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed. After the operation effect is executed, the first variation pattern that displays a blue background expectation suggestion, and after the button operation promotion display is displayed, a character such as “This variation is highly expected” is displayed in red. After the operation effect is performed, an effect pattern selection table is used that allows selection of the second variation pattern that displays the degree of expectation of the red background.

  In the first effect, when a big win display result is obtained, an effect pattern is selected at a selection ratio of “first pattern <second pattern”, and when a disapproval display result is obtained, “first pattern> second pattern”. An effect pattern selection table for the first effect is provided for each variable display result so as to select the effect pattern at the selection ratio. In the effect pattern selection table, as in the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect, the value of SR3 ′ is assigned to each effect pattern.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the second effect, for example, in the operation effect display area 9095, an operation effect in which a character such as “reach?” Is displayed in blue letters in response to the operation after the button operation promotion display is performed. After performing the operation, after the stick operation promotion display is displayed, after performing the operation effect in which characters such as “SP may?” Are displayed in blue according to the operation, a blue effect image is displayed around the effect pattern After executing the operation effect in which the first effect pattern to be displayed and the button operation promotion display is displayed and a character such as “Leach may?” Is displayed in red according to the operation, the stick operation promotion display is performed After executing the operation effect in which characters such as “SP may?” Are displayed in red according to the operation, a second effect pattern that displays a red effect image around the effect symbol is selected. Can become such effect pattern selection table is used.

  In the second effect, when the jackpot display result is obtained, the effect pattern is selected at a selection ratio of “first pattern <second pattern”, and when the result is a disapproval display result, “first pattern> second pattern”. An effect pattern selection table for the second effect is provided for each variation display result so as to select the effect pattern at the selection ratio. In the effect pattern selection table, as in the effect pattern selection table of the third specific effect, the value of SR3 ′ is assigned to each effect pattern.

  Next, processing for setting various effects including timer effects as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S90616). In FIG. 61, the process regarding the setting of a timer effect is shown among the various settings included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines the various effects to be executed in the timer effect by performing the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display executed this time is the variation pattern of the fourth super reach, which is the specific super reach, based on the variation pattern command received during the current variation (S90901). The received variation pattern command is stored in a command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 90103. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 90103, and has a variation pattern of the fourth super reach depending on whether or not a variation pattern command of the fourth super reach is stored in an area indicating the variation display executed this time. It is determined whether or not. If it is not the variation pattern of the fourth super reach, the process proceeds to S90912. If it is the variation pattern of the fourth super reach, the value of SR2 is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the present variation display is a big hit (disappears), either one shown in FIGS. The timer effect selection table is selected, and the selected table is used to select whether to execute the timer display presence effect or the timer display no effect for the current variation display from the extracted SR2 ′ value. (S90902). Whether or not the display result of the current variable display is a big hit is determined by the display result command received when the current variable display is executed or not. .

  Next, based on the determination result of S90902, it is determined whether or not the timer display presence effect is selected and determined (S90903). When the timer display effect is not selected and determined in S90903 (timer display non-effect is selected and determined), for example, in the first to third effects as exemplified in FIGS. 57 (B2), (C2), etc. Data is set to execute an effect without display, and the process proceeds to S90912. On the other hand, when the timer display presence effect is selected and determined in S90903, the value of SR3 ′ is extracted, and the operation effect selection tables for the first effect to the third effect shown in FIGS. 59 (C) to (E) are selected. Then, using the selected table, whether or not the operation effect is to be executed (presence / absence) is selected and determined for each of the first to third effects in the current variation display from the extracted SR3 ′ value (S90904).

  Next, based on the determination result of S90904, it is determined whether or not the first effect is selected and determined to have an operation effect (S90905). If it is not determined in step S90905 that the operation effect is present, the process advances to step S90907. On the other hand, when the operation effect is selected and determined in step S90905, the value of SR4 ′ is extracted, and any of the above-described first values is selected depending on whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit (missed). An effect pattern selection table for one effect is selected, and using the selected table, the effect pattern of the first effect of the current variation display is selected and determined from the extracted SR4 ′ value (S90906), and the process proceeds to S90907.

  In S90907, based on the determination result of S90904, it is determined whether or not the second effect is selected and determined to have the operation effect (S90907). If it is not determined in step S90907 that the operation effect is present, the process advances to step S90909. On the other hand, when the operation effect is selected and determined in S90907, the value of SR4 ′ is extracted, and one of the above-described second values is selected depending on whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit (missed). An effect pattern selection table for two effects is selected, and using the selected table, the effect pattern for the second effect of the current variation display is selected from the extracted SR4 ′ value (S90908), and the process proceeds to S90909.

  In S90909, based on the determination result of S90904, it is determined whether or not the third effect is selected and determined to have the operation effect (S90909). If it is not determined that the operation effect is present in S90909, the process proceeds to S90911. On the other hand, when the operation effect is selected and determined in S90909, the value of SR4 ′ is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit (disappears), FIG. The effect pattern selection table for the third effect in (B) is selected, and the effect pattern for the third effect of the current variation display is selected and determined from the extracted SR4 ′ value using the selected table (S90910). ), Go to S90911.

  In S90911, timer display is performed for each of the first to third effects in the current variation display, and the operation effect is executed with the effect pattern selected as described above according to the presence or absence of the operation effect selected as described above. Data for executing possible effects is set (S90911), and the process proceeds to S90912.

  In S90912, regarding the current variation display effect, other effect contents other than the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect described above are determined. Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the effect setting process, when a timer effect including an operation effect as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 is executed, at the start of variable display, the presence / absence of a timer display effect, the presence / absence of an operation effect, the number of executions of the operation effect In addition, since various items such as the effect pattern of the operation effect are determined in advance and the subsequent change display is performed according to the determination, the control processing load of the effect control microcomputer 90100 during the variable display is reduced. can do.

  Next, processing for executing various effects including timer effects as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 during the effect symbol variation display will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a timer effect process that is executed when a timer effect is generated in the effect symbol changing process (S90802).

  FIG. 62 shows a process related to the setting of the timer effect among various settings included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines the various effects to be executed in the timer effect by performing the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start of execution of any of the timer effects that can be executed in the first effect to the third effect (S90920). In step S90920, the time schedule of the presentation progress determined in advance in the variation pattern of the fourth super reach during the variation display and the time value of the variation display timer that measures the time from the start of the variation display are confirmed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start of execution of the timer effect. Such a determination can be made because the time schedule of the timing of the production progress is determined in advance for each variation pattern, and the production control for producing the production is executed based on the time value of the fluctuation display timer. It is.

  When the execution of the timer effect is started in S90920, the effect control microcomputer 90100 starts to measure the effect timer used for timer display (S90921), and starts the timer display corresponding to the measured value (S90922). The process ends. On the other hand, when the execution of the timer effect is not the start time in S90920, the period of the effect (for example, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect) for which the operation effect is present is set based on the time value of the variable display timer. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S90923).

  If it is during the effect period in which the presence of the operation effect is set in S90923, based on the time value of the variable display timer, it is determined whether or not any operation effect period is in the effect period (S90924). ). When the operation effect period is in S90924, it is determined whether or not the operation promotion display during the operation effect (the button operation promotion display and the stick operation promotion display described above) is being performed (S90925). When the operation promotion display is being performed in S90925, the process proceeds to S90927. On the other hand, when the operation promotion display is not being performed in S90925, the operation promotion display set according to the mode of the operation effect period being executed is started (S90926), and the process proceeds to S90927. Thereby, in each operation effect, the operation promotion display like FIG. 58 (A), (C), (E), (G), (I) is performed.

  In S90927, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined operation effect corresponding to the operation promotion effect is detected (S90927). When a predetermined operation effect corresponding to S90927 is not detected, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined operation effect corresponding to S90927 is detected, the operation promotion display being executed is terminated (S90928), and the period of the first effect and the period of the second effect are based on the setting information in S90911. And the operation corresponding | compatible effect according to the kind of period of the operation effect like the period of the 3rd effect is started (S90929), and a process is complete | finished.

  In each of the above-described S90923 when the specific effect is not set during the specific effect period and when it is not during any operation effect period in S90924, the time of the effect timer ends (when the first effect is 25 seconds elapsed). Then, it is determined whether or not 40 seconds have elapsed in the second effect, and 60 seconds have elapsed in the third effect (S90930). If it is not at the end of the timing of the effect timer in S90930, it is determined whether or not the present is during the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect (S90931). If the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect is not in S90931, the process ends. On the other hand, when the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect is being performed in S90931, since the effect period has ended, the operation promotion effect or the operation corresponding effect that is being executed is ended (S90932), and the process ends.

  In S90930, when the timing of the production timer is ended, it is the end of the timer display and the start of the execution of the expectation suggestion display after the timer display ends. Therefore, the expectation suggestion display set in S90911 Is started (S90933). Then, the timer display being executed is terminated (S90934), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the expectation suggestion display as shown in FIG. 58 (K) is executed, and the timer display area 9094 and the operation effect display area 9095 as shown in FIG. 58 (K) are deleted.

[Examples of operation effects suggesting which of several types of predetermined effects will be executed]
Next, as an operation effect that is a motion-corresponding effect, an effect (such as the expectation level% in FIGS. 57 and 58) that suggests an expectation level that is advantageous to the player (such as a big hit game state), and a plurality of types An example of executing at least one of the effects that suggest which one of the predetermined effects is executed will be described.

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 60, an effect suggesting which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is executed is not executed for the operation effect. However, with regard to the operation effects, for example, there are a plurality of types of special reach effects (SP effects, etc.), and when the effects develop from a normal reach effect state to a special reach effect, an effect suggesting the development destination of the effect is performed. An effect suggesting which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is to be executed may be executed. When such an operation effect is executed, at least one of the operation effect and an operation effect that suggests a degree of expectation that is a big hit, such as an operation effect that displays the expectation level% in FIGS. 57 and 58, is executed. Production control may be performed. In this way, variations in operation effects are abundant, and the player's boredom can be further reduced.

  Next, the first area effect and the second area effect as the area effects executed in other embodiments, and the special effect and the timer effect executed in the first area effect will be described.

[Second example of timer production]
[One area production]
The first area effects are all effects executed in the first area 9091 (see FIG. 63) located at the lower left of the effect display device 909 when the variable display based on the stored storage information is executed. During the execution of the first region effect, an effect that displays a timer after executing a special effect, which will be described later, and executes a timer effect, or a so-called gas effect (“GASE” that displays nothing after executing a special effect is “ An effect is executed that includes the meaning of “false”. The first area effect is not limited to the first area 9091, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

[Special production]
In the special effect, the timer effect is executed after the special effect is executed by executing the “visible / hidden display” in which the timer frame 9097 that suggests the execution of the timer effect is displayed or not displayed in the first area 9091. It is an effect that displays a suggestion that suggests. After executing the special effect for a predetermined time, the timer effect or the gaze effect that does not execute the timer effect is executed from the special effect. The special effect is not limited to the effect described above, and may be an effect suggesting execution of the timer effect. For example, the effect may indicate whether or not a semi-transparent timer frame is realized.

[Timer production]
The timer effect is obtained by updating a period display that indicates an effect period such as a waiting time until execution of a specific effect after execution of the special effect in a timer display format when the variable display based on the stored storage information is executed. When the display is in a predetermined mode, it is an effect that executes any one of a plurality of types of effects. In the timer display, the count value is updated from the initial value of the count value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the timer display value becomes 0 (value indicating 0 seconds). The timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed in the first area 91 over a predetermined period during the variable display.

[Second area production]
The second area effect is a plurality of types of predetermined displays that suggest a display result of the variable display and an effect executed during the change after the specific effect described later is executed when the variable display based on the stored storage information is executed. An effect of displaying one of the predetermined displays is executed. The second area effect is not limited to the second area 9092, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

  The specific effect is an effect suggesting that one predetermined display among a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. After executing the specific effect for a predetermined time, for example, one predetermined display is displayed among a plurality of types of predetermined displays indicating the effect state or the game state such as “?”, “NEXT”, and “READY GO”. As a specific effect, for example, a virtual rotating reel with all predetermined indications is rotated for a predetermined time at a speed at which it is impossible to visually recognize which predetermined indication is displayed, and then gradually rotated. After the speed is lowered and the predetermined display is made visible, an effect of stopping at a position where one predetermined display can be visually recognized is executed. The specific effect is not limited to the above-described effect, but may be an effect that suggests that one predetermined display among a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. Further, the predetermined display includes a timer effect suggestion display that suggests a timer effect and a plurality of types of specific displays other than the timer effect suggestion display. The specific display will be described later (see FIG. 61).

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for describing a region effect including a first region effect and a second region effect. FIG. 63A is a diagram illustrating a display example of the effect display device 909 at the start of change when the region effect is not executed. FIGS. 63B to 63D are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 during the first region effect. FIGS. 63E and 63F are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 during execution of the second region effect. In FIG. 63, the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are variably displayed is indicated by three downward arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, in the display area of the effect display device 909, a display area of a first area 9091 capable of executing the first area effect is provided on the lower left side, and the second area effect is displayed on the lower right side. A display area of an executable second area 9092 is provided. In the first area 9091, an image related to the area is basically not displayed, and an image related to the area is displayed as necessary. In FIG. 63A, in the second area 9092, an image relating to the area is always displayed.

  FIG. 63A shows a state in which neither the area effect of the first area effect nor the second area effect is executed at the start of the change of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol. Specifically, nothing is displayed in the first area 9091 indicated by a broken line in the drawing. In the second area 9092, a frame that can specify that the area is the second area 9092 is displayed. Moreover, the area | region inside a frame part is displayed by the display mode which shows a shutter, for example (illustration omitted), and the shutter part is normally closed. Then, when the second region effect is executed, the shutter portion is opened.

  The timer effect image displayed when the first region effect is executed in the first region 9091 is a timer frame 9097 and a timer display for displaying a timer value in the timer frame 9097 as shown in FIG. 9094. Each image of the timer frame 9097 and the timer value is displayed in one of a plurality of display colors such as white and red.

  When the first area effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the first area 9091, the timer frame 9097 of a color selected from a plurality of display colors is reciprocated in the direction of the arrow in the symbol. By displaying the image to be displayed, a special effect of performing “visible / hidden display” is repeatedly performed which is repeatedly displayed or not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909.

  After execution of the special effect, a gas effect as shown in FIG. 63 (c) or a timer effect as shown in FIG. 63 (d) is executed. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the gaze effect is an effect in which the timer effect is not executed, and nothing is displayed in the first area 9091 by erasing the timer frame 9097 that is visible and hidden. It becomes a state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), when the timer effect is executed, the timer frame 9097 that is visible and hidden is displayed in any one of a plurality of display colors in the first area 9091. The In the timer frame 9097, a timer display 9094 appears and appears in any one of a plurality of display colors, and a time period such as “10:00” indicating 10 seconds is indicated as a timer value. . In the timer effect, after such a timing period is shown in the timer display 9094, the countdown timing in the timer display 9094 is started.

  In the timer effect, when the countdown of the timer display 9094 proceeds and the timer value of the timer display 9094 becomes “00:00” indicating 0 second, the effect control starts the super reach effect specified by the change pattern command at the start of change. Is executed.

  As described above, when the first area effect is executed, the timer display 9094 is displayed in the first area 9091 and the timer effect is executed, and then the predetermined effect such as the super reach effect can be executed. Thereby, when a special effect in which the timer frame 9097 is displayed and hidden is executed in the first area effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the timer effect is executed.

  Further, after the special effect shown in FIG. 63 (b) is executed, the timer effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 63 (d), or may not be executed as shown in FIG. 63 (c). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before executing the timer effect, and to improve the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the first area 9091, the timer effect is displayed by executing a special effect that suggests that the timer display 9094 is executed by showing and hiding the timer frame 9097. It can be noted whether or not it is executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  When the second area effect is executed in the second area 9092, as shown in FIG. 63D, within the frame portion of the second area 9092, “?”, “NEXT”, and , “READY GO” and the like are sequentially displayed as indicated by the arrows in the figure, which indicate a plurality of types of indications indicating the effect state or the game state. Then, after the elapse of a specific period from the start of the specific effect, any one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In the figure, an example is shown in which the predetermined display of “extreme heat” is stopped and displayed.

  In the second area effect, when any kind of predetermined display is stopped and displayed in the second area 9092, an effect corresponding to the stopped and displayed predetermined display is subsequently executed. For example, when a predetermined display “READY GO” is designated and displayed, a predetermined timer effect is executed. When the predetermined display “NEXT” is designated and displayed, the above-described pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  Thus, after the second area effect is executed, various effects corresponding to the predetermined display stopped and displayed in the second area 9092 can be executed. Thereby, when a 2nd specific production is performed, a player's attention can be drawn to the display of the 2nd field 9092, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the other first embodiment, the special effect is an effect of executing “visible / hidden display”. However, the effect is not limited to this and may be an effect that suggests the execution of the timer effect. For example, an effect of displaying a translucent timer frame or an effect of displaying a virtual rotating reel with a plurality of types of timer values and rotating the rotating reel may be used. Further, the specific effect is an effect of rotating a virtual rotating reel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any effect that suggests that one predetermined display among a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. For example, an effect of displaying a virtual shutter in the second area 9092 and opening and closing the shutter, or an effect of displaying a predetermined display in the second area 9092 in a translucent manner may be used.

  The effect control related to the second example of the timer effect described above is executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100.

[Other Second Embodiment]
In the other second embodiment, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 will be described with respect to the second example of the timer effect shown in the other first embodiment. Here, as a timer effect according to another second embodiment, an effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown as a representative example, but a timer effect according to another second embodiment can be executed in the second area 92 in the same manner. It is.

  The timer presentation executed in the other second embodiment is a period display in which a presentation period such as a waiting time until a specific presentation is executed in a timer display format when a variable display based on the hold storage information is executed. When the timer display becomes a predetermined mode by updating, the effect is to execute any one of a plurality of types of effects. In the timer display, the count value is updated from the initial value of the count value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the timer display value becomes 0 (value indicating 0 seconds). The timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed on the effect display device 909 over a predetermined period during the variable display.

  In addition, during execution of the timer effect, after the timer display is counted down during the period from the start of the period display by the timer display until the period display becomes 0 which is a predetermined mode, the timer display is counted as a stop mode. There is a case where the value of the timer display is set to 0 after stopping for 2 seconds and passing through the stop mode. In this way, the effect that stops the countdown of the timer display for several seconds is hereinafter referred to as a freeze effect. The freeze effect may be such that the countdown of the timer display does not completely stop for several seconds and the countdown does not advance beyond a predetermined period. For example, if a freeze effect is generated with a timer display of “15:47” in the middle of the countdown, a specific number is identified as “15:46” → “15:47” → “15:46” By going back and forth between these numbers, it may be an effect that the timer display does not advance the countdown beyond a predetermined period. Also, the countdown progresses from “15:47” → “15:46” → “15:45”, but it seems that the time has hardly progressed by making the countdown extremely slower than the actual time measurement. It may be a production.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect in another second embodiment. FIGS. 64A to 64E are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 when the freeze effect is executed during the timer effect. FIGS. 64F to 64I are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 when the freeze effect is not executed during the timer effect. Here, in the timer effect, any one of a plurality of types of times is determined as the number of seconds of the timer effect. In FIGS. 64A to 64E, a time of 30 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect. In FIGS. 64F to 64I, a time of 20 seconds is selected as a period for executing the timer effect. In addition, the timer effect of the other second embodiment may be executed in the second area 9092 or may be executed in any area in the effect display device 909.

  As shown in FIG. 64A, when the timer effect is started, for example, a time measurement period “20:00” indicating 20 seconds is displayed in the first area 9091 as the timer display 9094. The period displayed on the timer display 9094 is displayed up to two digits (one hundredth) in seconds and the value is counted down as time passes. FIG. 64B is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 64B, when “10:00” indicating 10 seconds is displayed every 10 seconds, a LOCK display 9095 is displayed above the timer display 9094. The LOCK display 9095 is an effect that the display image acts on the timer display 9094, and the display image indicated by the characters LOCK is added to the timer display 9094. A freeze effect is executed by adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094. In this way, by adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094, the player can easily recognize that the freeze effect is being executed.

  FIG. 64C is a diagram showing a display mode of the timer display 9094 when 10 seconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 64B and 64C, when the freeze effect is executed, the display of the timer display 9094 is stopped for 10 seconds while the display of “10:00” is maintained, and the LOCK display is displayed. 9095 is added. After the 10 second freeze period, the timer display 9094 is counted down again as shown in FIG. 64 (d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed as “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the fact that the timer display has reached 0 seconds, any one of the effects is executed from among a plurality of effects.

  Here, an example is shown about the effect performed when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 second. The effects executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds include, for example, an effect that the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-continuous temporarily stops (for example, the symbol described as “NEXT” temporarily stops), and the reach symbol An effect indicating that the game has stopped and reached reach (for example, an accessory operates at the timing of the reach symbol stop), an effect indicating the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation during the reach effect (for example, Change to a high background). The effect executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds is not limited to the effect shown here, and may be any effect.

  Next, the case where the freeze effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIGS. When a time of 20 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect, as shown in FIG. 64F, when the timer effect is started, for example, “20:00” indicating 20 seconds as the timer display 9094. Is displayed in the first area 91. FIG. 64 (g) is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 64 (g), “10:00” indicating 10 seconds is displayed every 10 seconds. Since the freeze effect is not executed, the LOCK display 9095 is not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), when 1 second has elapsed from FIG. 64 (g), the timer display is displayed as “09: 0” indicating 9 seconds, as shown in FIG. 64 (h). . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (i), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed as “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the fact that the timer display has reached 0 seconds, any one of the effects is executed from among a plurality of effects. Here, in FIGS. 64 (a) to (i), the timer display 9094 having two digits after the second is actually counted down, but is not disclosed in detail on the drawing. Alternatively, only the number of seconds, such as “10”, “9”... “0”, may be counted down without displaying two digits after the second.

  In this way, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is a pattern that goes through the freeze effect in the period from when the display is started until it reaches “00:00” indicating 0 seconds, which is a predetermined mode. And a pattern that does not go through freeze production. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 in the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

  Further, in the pattern in which the freeze effect is executed in the timer effect, the timer display 9094 is updated again after the freeze effect is executed for 10 seconds, as shown in FIGS. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 during the period until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds.

  In addition, although the timer selection time for determining the timer seconds (time from the start of the timer display to 0 seconds) that is the number of seconds in which the timer effect is executed is different, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the display mode at the start of the timer display 9094 is the same (both are the same at “20:00”) in the case of not executing and the case of executing the freeze effect. In this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect without determining whether or not to pass the freeze effect at the start of the timer display 9094.

[Other third embodiment]
In another third embodiment, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 will be described with respect to the second example of the timer effect shown in the other first embodiment. Here, as a timer effect according to the other third embodiment, an effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown as a representative example, but a timer effect according to the other third embodiment can be similarly executed in the second area 9092. It is.

  In the timer effect executed in the other third embodiment, the timer effect of the special pattern is set in addition to the timer effect of the normal pattern. The timer effect of the normal pattern is a pattern in which the display value of the timer display is only counted down with the lapse of time during the period from when the timer display is started until the timer display becomes 0 second. On the other hand, in the timer effect of the special pattern, when the timer display 9094 is counted down to 0 seconds, the effect using the operation means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. The player's operation with the stick controller 90122 is detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 90123. Specifically, when the player performs an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 when the timer display 9094 is counted down to 0 seconds, the number of seconds of the timer display 9094 that has been 0 seconds increases, and the countdown is again performed. The effect that is executed is performed. Such a special pattern may be executed a plurality of times, and when it finally reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect is executed.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect in another third embodiment. 65A is a diagram showing a timing chart in the case of a two-time pattern with a timer selection time of 20 seconds as a special pattern of the timer effect. The two-time pattern indicates an effect pattern in which an effect using the operation means is executed twice during execution of the timer effect. FIGS. 65B to 65I are diagrams showing display examples of the timer display 9094 in the pattern of FIG. First, the timer effect of the special pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. The special pattern may be provided not only with the twice pattern but also with a one-time pattern or three or more patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, in the two-time pattern with a timer selection time of 20 seconds executed as a timer effect, “04:00” is first displayed on the timer display 9094 (FIG. 65B). From this state, the timer display 9094 counts down for 4 seconds. When the timer display 9094 becomes a value indicated by “00:00” (FIG. 65 (c)), an operation effect for operating the operation means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. In the stick controller 90122, a period during which the operation is effective (hereinafter also referred to as an operation effective period) is set to 2 seconds. When an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is performed by the player during the operation effective period of 2 seconds, “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 65 (d )). The display of “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation effective period and a period obtained by adding 1 second (minimum period of timer display) to the time, and “00” is displayed as the timer display 9094. The number of seconds increases from “0:00”, and the value “04:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 65E).

  If the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed within the operation effective period of 2 seconds, “+04: 00” is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation effective period. It is displayed (FIG. 65 (d)). The display of “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and the number of seconds is increased from “00:00” as the timer display 9094. The value “04:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 65 (e)).

  Here, whether or not the stick controller 90122 is operated, the display of “+04: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for at least one second (FIG. 65 (d)). )). Further, as the timer display 9094, the number of seconds increases from “00:00”, and the value “04:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 65 (e)). At this time, the player can recognize that the number of seconds in the timer display 9094 has increased. The total period of the operation valid period (operation 2 seconds in FIG. 65 (a)) and the timer display period (timer display 1 second in FIG. 65 (a)) of the effect display device 909 indicating the increased number of seconds of the timer display 9094 is 3 Set to seconds.

  Thereafter, the timer display 9094 starts counting down from 4 seconds indicated by “04:00”, and when the timer display 9094 becomes a value indicated by “00:00” (FIG. 65 (f)), An effect of pulling the stick controller 90122 is executed during the operation valid period. When the player performs an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 within 2 seconds, “+06: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 65 (g)). The display of “+06: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation effective period and a period obtained by adding 1 second to the time, and the number of seconds from “00:00” is displayed as the timer display 9094. The value of “06:00:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 65 (h)).

  If the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed within the operation effective period of 2 seconds, “+06: 00” is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation effective period. Is displayed (FIG. 65 (g)). The display of “+06: 00” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and the number of seconds is increased from “00:00” as the timer display 9094, A value of “06:00:00” is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 65 (h)).

  When the timer display 9094 starts counting down from 6 seconds and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by “00:00” (FIG. 65 (i)), a predetermined effect is executed. Any effect that is executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds may be used.

  As described above, in the special pattern, when the timer effect is started and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by 0 seconds, the number of seconds in the timer display 9094 is increased, and an effect in which the countdown is executed again is performed. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the effect when the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. In addition, such a special pattern timer effect may cause the player to pay attention to the display mode in the period from when the timer display 9094 starts to count down until the timer display 9094 finally reaches 0 seconds. it can.

[Other Fourth Embodiment]
In the other fourth embodiment, a modified example of the timer effect executed in each of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 will be described with respect to the second example of the timer effect shown in the other first embodiment. Here, as a timer effect according to the other fourth embodiment, an example of applying to each timer effect of the first region 9091 and the second region 9092 is a single region called a third region 9096 shown in FIG. This will be described using a representative example.

  The timer effect in the other fourth embodiment is executed during reach. Here, as shown in FIG. 47, the reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern and a super reach variation pattern. When a variation pattern command designating super reach is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the effect of super reach designated based on the transmitted command. In the first to fourth super reaches in FIG. 47, any one of the plurality of types of special reach (hereinafter also simply referred to as SP reach) is executed for each variation pattern.

  In the SP reach, reach is made in any of the effect symbols during the variable display. Thereafter, after reaching the reach state, the system develops into SP reach after a predetermined time has elapsed (after normal reach or after reach production different from normal reach). The SP reach executed in the super reach is a reach with a high expectation that results in a big hit display as compared with a normal reach that does not develop to the SP reach and does not perform a flashy production after the reach. During SP reach, for example, effects such as battle effects are executed on the liquid crystal screen. The battle effect is an effect in which when a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other and the teammate character wins, the jackpot display result is displayed, and when the teammate character loses, the display result is displayed.

  In another fourth embodiment, a case will be described in which a timer effect is started in a third area 9096, which is the lower central area of the display screen of the effect display device 909. For example, during SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire screen is executed. In such a case, the timer display 9094 displayed in the third area 9096 does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 909 so that such an effect is not hindered (for example, the lower left position of the effect display device 909). The display 9094 is moved. In other 4th Embodiment, a timer effect and SP reach are performed simultaneously. An effect when the timer effect and the SP reach are executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect in the other fourth embodiment. When the timer effect is executed, a pattern as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) and a pattern shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (c) are executed. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the reach is displayed with the symbol “4” in the effect display device 9, a timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen. In the timer image, a timer display 9094 displayed as “20:00” is displayed. The timer display 9094 is counted down as time passes.

  The pattern from FIG. 66A to FIG. 66B shows a case where the normal reach evolves to the weak SP reach. The weak SP reach is an SP reach with a low expectation level resulting in a jackpot display result as compared to a strong SP reach described later. The degree of expectation resulting in the jackpot display result is indicated by the number of black stars shown in FIG. 66 (b). The weak SP reach that is executed this time is 2 out of 5 so that the expectation is not so high. During the weak SP reach, the effect symbol is displayed in a reduced (reduced) command symbol in the upper right area of the effect display device 909. Further, the timer image moves from the position at the lower center of the screen to the position at the lower left end (position corresponding to the first area 9091) when the weak SP reach is started.

  When SP reach is executed, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image may change. However, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the weak SP reach, the frame portion 9096a is displayed in the same manner as FIG. 66 (a) before the development to the SP reach. In addition, the timer display 9094 is counted down and indicated by “15:00”. During SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire display screen is executed as compared to the case shown in FIG. 66 (a) before SP reach development. When a flashy effect such as an SP reach effect is executed, if the timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen, the effect is hindered. Therefore, when SP reach is executed during the period from when the timer display 9094 is started until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds, the timer display 9094 corresponds to the position of the left end of the screen (corresponding to the first area 9091). Position). When SP reach is not executed, the timer image does not change at the position of the lower center of the screen and the timer display 9094 is counted down.

  As described above, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is performed during the period from when the display of the timer display 9094 is started until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the state of the effect of whether or not an effect such as SP reach is being executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 66 (c) shows a case where the reach state of FIG. 66 (a) has evolved to a strong SP reach. The strong SP reach has a higher expectation level as a jackpot display result than the weak SP reach. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), the strong SP reach executed this time is an effect with a high jackpot expectation because the expectation is 4 out of 5 levels. During the strong SP reach, the effect symbol is displayed as a command symbol in a downsized (reduced) form in the upper right area of the effect display device 909. Further, the timer image moves from the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen to the position at the lower left end (the position corresponding to the first area 9091) when the strong SP reach is started.

  When the strong SP reach is executed, the mode of the frame portion 9096b of the timer image changes. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), the color of the frame 9096b changes from white to red (shaded portion in FIG. 66 (c)). In addition, the timer display 9094 is counted down and indicated by “15:00”. Even in the strong SP reach, when the SP reach is executed during the period from the start of the timer display 9094 until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds as in the case of the weak SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed at the left end of the screen. It is moved to a position (a position corresponding to the first region 9091).

  As described above, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is performed during the period from when the display of the timer display 9094 is started until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the state of the effect of whether or not an effect such as SP reach is being executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, the SP reach is a reach with a high degree of expectation for jackpots compared to a normal reach that ends without developing to the SP reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by taking into account the execution of such a highly anticipated reach that is a big hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, in the normal state (the state where only the reach is applied) before developing to the SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed in the third area 9096 at the center lower part of the effect display device 909, During the execution of SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed at the position on the lower left end of the effect display device 909 (the position corresponding to the first area 9091). Therefore, by preventing the timer display 9094 from inhibiting the effect during the SP reach, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 66, when the weak SP reach is being executed, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image is not changed to white, and when the strong SP reach is being executed, the frame portion 9096b of the timer image is red. Change and display. If it does in this way, the display degree of the frame of the timer display 9094 according to the SP reach to be executed will show the degree of expectation for the big hit, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  When the timer effect of the fourth embodiment is being executed, the second area effect as shown in the first embodiment may be executed at a position corresponding to the second area 9092. .

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 59 (C) to 59 (E), even if the timer effect is executed during the same variation display, the operation effect is executed when the effect period is longer than when the effect period is shorter. Data is set so that the percentage of As a result, even if the timer display is executed during the same variable display, even if the timer display is performed with a long display period, the player can display the operation effect because the execution ratio of the operation effect is set high. The ratio of intervening in the game becomes high, and it can be reduced that the player is bored with the production.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 57 (C1), in the third effect, the player's game is executed because a plurality of operation effects that the player can intervene by operation are executed in accordance with the progress of the timer effect. Can increase the willingness to participate in the game and improve the fun of the game.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 57 (C1), in the third effect, in the timer-equipped effect, in the period from the start of the third effect to the lapse of 60 seconds, a fixed period T (10 seconds) interval Since there are cases where a plurality of operation effects such as the first operation effect to the fifth operation effect are executed, the player's boredom when a relatively long time is displayed in the timer display can be reduced.

  (4) As described in [Example of operation effect suggesting which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is executed], an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous for a player as an operation effect that is a motion-related effect Etc.) is performed, and at least one of the effects suggesting which one of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is executed is executed. In the example, variations of operation effects are enriched, and the player's boredom can be further reduced.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 57 (C1), in the third effect, different operation means such as an operation effect corresponding to the button operation and an operation effect corresponding to the stick operation are made according to the timer timing. Since the operation corresponding effect according to the operation can be executed, the player's boredom can be further reduced.

  (6) As shown in FIGS. 59 (C) to 59 (E), it is possible to select to perform the operation effect only when the timer display effect is present, and when the timer display effect is performed, the timer display effect is not performed. Since the ratio of execution of the operation effects is high, the execution ratio of the effects in which the player can intervene is increased, so that the player can be further reduced from being bored with the effects in the long-time timer display. .

  (7) As shown in FIG. 63, after the special effect of FIG. 63 (b) is executed, the timer effect is executed as shown in FIG. 22 (d), and as shown in FIG. 63 (c). By not being executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before executing the timer effect. Interest can be improved.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the first region 9091, the timer effect is displayed by executing the special effect indicating that the timer display 9094 is executed by showing and hiding the timer frame 9097. Can be noticed whether or not is executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved in the process before the timer effect is executed.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 66, special effects can be executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of change or at the start of reach. Can be executed, the player can be noticed at which timing the area effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  (10) As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the first area effect is different between the time of loss and the time of big hit, and the selection of the timer effect in the first area effect is different between the time of loss and the time of big hit. It can be made to pay more attention at which timing special effects are executed due to different ratios or the like.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 66, as the timer frame 9097 that is displayed and hidden during the special effect, a plurality of types of special effects including a special effect that displays a white timer frame 9097 and a special effect that displays a red timer frame 9097. It can be made to notice which kind of special effect is performed by being able to perform any of these.

  (12) As shown in FIG. 66, before the red timer numerical value display is executed, the white timer frame display / hidden display can be executed, for example, so that the special effect of performing the white timer frame display / hidden display is executed. Even if it is done, it can prevent the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state from being lowered.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 64, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is counted down from the start of the display until “00:00” indicating 0 seconds which is a predetermined mode. A pattern that passes through the freeze effect and a pattern that does not pass through the freeze effect are provided. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 in the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

  (14) As shown in FIG. 65, when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds, a special pattern in which the time measured value of the timer display 9094 increases can be executed, so that the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. The player can pay attention to the production at the time.

  (15) As shown in FIG. 66, the effect of whether or not an effect such as SP reach is being executed by changing the position of the third region 9096 depending on whether or not SP reach is being executed. The game's interest is improved.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the first example of the timer effect, when the predetermined display performs a predetermined operation and displays in a specific mode, and when the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, any one of a plurality of types of specific effects is specified. The example of effect control which performs an effect was demonstrated. The “predetermined display” is not limited to a display in which the numerical value changes with the passage of time as shown in FIG. 58, but does not directly indicate the passage of time with a numerical value like an hourglass. It may be such that the progress is shown indirectly. As another example that indirectly indicates the passage of time, for example, a display that repeats the same operation such that an image showing a bomb is likely to explode in accordance with the passage of time may be used. In addition, the “predetermined display” is repeated to expand and contract in a manner that the bomb is likely to explode with the same size until a predetermined timing as time elapses, but the bomb is gradually enlarged and displayed after the predetermined timing elapses. It is also possible to perform various different operations.

  (2) The “predetermined display” described in the first example of the timer effect does not indicate the elapse of time, but may be a specific mode when the predetermined time elapses. For example, as the predetermined operation, an operation process in which an insect becomes a puppy from a larva and becomes an adult (specific mode) may be executed in accordance with the passage of time.

  (3) The “motion-related effect (operation effect)” described in the first example of the timer effect is an effect that is executed when the player operates, as shown in FIGS. 59 (C) to 59 (E). For example, the effect is controlled such that the third effect with a longer timer period has a higher rate (frequency) of executing the operation effect than the first effect with a shorter timer period. Increasing the rate (frequency) at which the motion-related effect is executed may be realized by setting the frequency of executing the operation promotion display shown in FIG. In addition, the motion-related effect that increases the ratio (frequency) is automatically performed when the motion detection valid period has elapsed even if the player's actual motion is not detected after the operation promotion display is executed. May be included.

  (4) In the operation effect display area 9095 shown in FIG. 57, an image that is a specific image of the operation effective period when the operation effect is executed may be displayed. In that case, it is preferable that the display of the operation valid period is not mistaken for the timer display. For example, the display of the operation effective period may not be a numerical value but may indicate the operation effective period by increasing or decreasing the gauge on the meter display, and the operation effective period may be indicated by blinking a button image or a stick image during the operation effective period. May be.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 60, images displayed in response to operation detection in a plurality of operation effects are displayed as fixed to one type or selected from a plurality of types. An example of what is displayed is mixed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and images displayed in response to operation detection in a plurality of operation effects may be displayed so as to be selected from a plurality of types for all operation effects. The effect may be displayed as if it were fixed to one type.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 60, for a plurality of operation effects, the same type of effects are executed in a predetermined order even if the degree of expectation of jackpot is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For a plurality of operation effects, the types of effects to be executed may be different according to the degree of expectation of jackpot. For example, a rare effect (premier effect) may be made possible as the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 60, an example is shown in which different types of effects are executed for a plurality of operation effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one type of production according to a predetermined story (story) may be executed in a plurality of times, and the production may be executed such that the story progresses for each operation production.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 57, an example is shown in which a plurality of operation effects are executed at regular intervals. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be executed at indefinite intervals. The execution intervals of the plurality of operation effects may be random execution intervals by lottery.

  (9) For the first effect having the shortest effect period, the operation effect may be executed a plurality of times. In that case, in the first effect to the third effect, an effect with a short effect period may be executed at a shorter time interval than an effect with a long effect period (for example, the third effect) (For the 10 seconds interval, the first effect is 3 seconds).

  (10) As shown in FIG. 57 (C), the execution interval of the operation effect at the time of the timer display is one type (10 seconds), but is not limited to this, the operation at the time of the timer display A plurality of types of production execution intervals (for example, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, and 15 seconds) may be provided, and an operation production may be executed at an execution interval selected from among a plurality of types.

  (11) As the motion-related effect, at least one effect of an effect that suggests an expectation degree that is advantageous for the player and an effect that suggests which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is executed is executed. In the example, the effect that is executed when the timer display becomes “0” may be suggested as an effect suggesting which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is executed. Other information such as the type of super reach to be executed may be suggested regardless of the effect executed when the value becomes “0”.

  (12) As an action-related effect, at least one effect of an effect that suggests an expectation level that is advantageous for the player and an effect that suggests which of a plurality of types of predetermined effects is executed is executed. In this example, either one of the suggestions may be made each time the operation means detects the operation means, and at the start of the variable display, which suggestion is made according to the progress of the production, the production control microcomputer 90100 May be selected and determined by lottery, and the suggestion effect may be executed in accordance with the selection determination.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 60, the execution order pattern of a plurality of operation effects is fixed in advance (the order of a plurality of types of operation means is regularly determined so as to alternate. Or the order of the plural types of operation means may be determined irregularly), or the execution order determined randomly by lottery at the start of variable display, etc. Good.

  (14) In the operation effect described above, as a detection means capable of detecting the player's operation (motion), a push sensor capable of detecting the operation of the operation means operable by the player such as the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122. Detection means such as 90124 and tilt direction sensor unit 90123 are shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means capable of detecting the player's movement is not a means for detecting the operation of the operation means, but directly detects the player's movement such as an infrared sensor and a motion sensor. Detectable detection means may be used.

  (15) For the operation effects described above, for example, an operation effect can be executed in an effect such as the first effect that has a short effect period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in an effect such as the first effect that has a short effect period, the operation effect may not be executed even once. Such a control example is also a control example in which an operation effect can be executed at a higher rate (frequency) in an effect with a long effect period such as the third effect than in an effect with a short effect period such as the first effect. Included as

  (16) The area effect may be executed only in one of the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. In such a case, if it is determined that the area effect is to be executed in one of the areas, the area effect may be limited not to be executed in the other area.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, when the timer effect (gase effect) is executed in the first area 9091, the execution of the timer effect is limited in the second area 9092. However, the timer effect may be executed simultaneously in both the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. In such a case, the value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the first area 9091 and the value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the second area 9092 may be updated simultaneously. In addition, the numerical value at that time may be the same in one region and the other region, or may be different. Alternatively, the countdown of the numerical value in the other area may be started after the countdown of the numerical value in one area is completed.

  (18) In the embodiment described above, a timer effect may be executed in the first area 9091 and the second area 9092. Then, when the values of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 simultaneously become values indicating 0 seconds, a predetermined effect may be executed. In such a case, the jackpot value expectation may be set to be higher when the timer effect is executed in both areas than when the timer effect is executed only in one area.

  (19) The timing at which the area effect is executed may be a timing other than the time when the change starts or before the reach starts. For example, timing such as predetermined timing during reach establishment or reach, timing at the start of pseudo-variable maximum variation display, start timing of SP reach, timing for executing pre-reading effects, etc. may be executed. . Also, the big hit expectation may be different depending on the execution timing. Moreover, you may make it perform at two or more timings among several timings.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, a timer display may be performed as a pending continuous notice during a big hit game. The holding continuous notice is a so-called holding continuous notice (i.e., one that prefetches the holding memory at the time of the big hit display result and the holding memory in the big hit game and generates a new big hit in the holding memory ( This means that a big hit gaming state is continuously generated). For example, when there is such a holding memory, the timer effect is started at a predetermined timing before the end of the big hit, and the fluctuation display of the holding memory that becomes a big hit is started at the timing when the timer value becomes 0. What should I do?

  (21) In the embodiment described above, a timer effect may be executed during the big hit round. In such a case, for example, the pending continuous notice may be executed at the timing when the timer value becomes 0, the probability change notification indicating that the probability change state is present, or the round continues. A round continuation notification indicating whether or not to perform may be executed.

  (22) The effects executed during the special effects and the timer effects may be determined at the same time, or the effects executed during the special effects and the timer effects may be determined separately. Further, the frame color may be determined when determining the effect executed in the special effect, and the display color of the timer may be determined when determining the effect executed in the timer effect.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, the content of the reserved storage data is determined (read-ahead) before the variable display performed in accordance with the reserved storage is started, and before the variable display is started. In addition, an area effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect for informing the reserved storage data. In such a case, a display such as “Preparing” may be displayed in the area where the area effect is executed to indicate to the player that the area effect is executed.

  (24) In the embodiment described above, the timer effect may be executed a plurality of times when the timer effect is executed. In such a case, you may make it show the frequency | count of execution of the timer effect performed in the future. For example, when “× 2” is displayed, it may be indicated that the timer effect is executed twice. Further, the number of executions of the timer effect may be indicated by displaying a plurality of timer images.

  (25) In the embodiment described above, the timer subtraction time may be set to one pattern by displaying “in preparation” when executing the timer effect and changing the display period in “in preparation”. Specifically, “preparing” may be displayed during the fluctuation display, and the timer display displayed after that may be displayed as the timer display 9094 for any fluctuation pattern. . In this way, since the actual subtraction time of the timer can be made one pattern, the design of the production becomes easy and the amount of data used for the production can be reduced.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, regarding the effect executed in the second region 9092, the big hit expectation is different between when the period display is executed and when the specific display other than the period display is executed. Also good. For example, when the period display is executed, the degree of jackpot expectation may be higher than when the specific display is executed. When the specific display is executed, the period display is executed. The big hit expectation may be made higher than the case.

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the frame of the second region 9092 is always displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 has been described. However, the frame of the second region 9092 may be displayed only at the timing when the region effect is executed. A special effect may also be executed for the second area 9092.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the timer display 9094 in which the digital display is counted down with time has been described as the period display displayed in the timer effect. However, the timer display 9094 may be configured such that an effect is executed when a number is counted up with time and a predetermined time is reached. In addition, it is not a numerical display as a period display indicating the passage of time, but a display of an hourglass image indicating the passage of time (a display of time according to the amount of sand remaining in the hourglass) or a gauge image indicating the passage of time. Any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes information that can suggest the end timing of a predetermined period with the passage of time, such as an item that is used and displayed (indicating time by increasing or decreasing the gauge). .

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration of the period display means for indicating the period elapsed information by updating the period display is provided. Further, there is provided a configuration of predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect when the period display updated by the period display means is in a predetermined mode. However, in the configuration of the period display means, the period display may be simply displayed without being updated. Specifically, an image in which the bomb lead wire is lit may be displayed as a display mode indicating the period display. Such an image may be any image as long as the igniting wire itself is not shortened, although it can be seen that the period display is made because the igniting wire of the bomb is on fire. Then, after an image with a fire on a bomb lead as a period display is displayed for a predetermined period, it may explode and some effect may be executed.

  (30) In the embodiment described above, the predetermined effect executed when the timer display becomes 0 may be any effect. For example, as a predetermined effect, a reach symbol is stopped, when a pseudo-continuous effect is stopped, a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped, a jackpot is confirmed (such as a jackpot sound or a premium notice), a predetermined super What develops to reach, or that operates the accessory may be executed. In such a case, at the timing when the timer display becomes 0, any effect selected from a plurality of types of effects may be executed. For example, if a single notification (a jackpot confirmation advance notice) is executed at the timing when the quasi-continuous symbols stop, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the area effect is executed in both the first area 9091 and the second area 9092, the timer effect is executed in one area, and the value becomes 0. The timer effect may be started in the other area.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, in the various settings shown in the above-described embodiment, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set. When a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever and the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player It is also possible to apply the present invention to a slot machine (slot machine) in which medals are paid out to a player. Specifically, the area effect may be executed on a display device such as an effect display device provided in the slot machine.

  (33) In the embodiment described above, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (34) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (35) As the present embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described, but the game media is enclosed and the game media is You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (36) In the embodiment described above, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described using a specific value exceeding 0% as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when the display result of the variation display is determined to be the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is unconditionally changed to the probability variation state. An example of controlled probability state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation controlled to the probability variation state is detected when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball devices 7 and 9020 The determination device type probability variation state control may be executed.

  (39) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Frame for gaming machines 4A ... 1st special symbol display device 4B ... 2nd special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5H ... Start winning memory display area 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... normal variable winning ball apparatus 7 ... special variable winning ball apparatus 8 ... speaker 9 ... lamp 11 ... main board 12 ... production control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 16 ... accessory control board 17 ... Movable accessory 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... First start port switch 22B ... Second start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 126 ... RTC circuit 901 ... Pachinko machine 9096 ... Third area 9097 ... Timer frame 90100 ... Production control microcomputer 90123 ... Tilt direction sensor unit 90124 ... Push sensor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
A predetermined display means for performing a predetermined operation by performing a predetermined operation;
A specific effect executing means capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of specific effects when the predetermined display becomes the specific mode;
Specific display executing means for performing specific display corresponding to the detecting means;
With
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display and a second specific display that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific display can be displayed.
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display,
In the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after the change is executed,
The predetermined display means is configured such that when the first period elapses, the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, or when the second period longer than the first period elapses, the predetermined display is the specific display. It is possible to display a second display that is an aspect,
A gaming machine, further comprising an effect control means for controlling an effect so that the ratio of the specific display being displayed is higher during the second period than during the first period.